WO2020038478A1 - 一种眼镜 - Google Patents

一种眼镜 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020038478A1
WO2020038478A1 PCT/CN2019/102386 CN2019102386W WO2020038478A1 WO 2020038478 A1 WO2020038478 A1 WO 2020038478A1 CN 2019102386 W CN2019102386 W CN 2019102386W WO 2020038478 A1 WO2020038478 A1 WO 2020038478A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
magnetic
circuit board
rotating shaft
magnetic element
vibration
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/102386
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
王跃强
张浩锋
李永坚
陈云斌
游芬
张磊
Original Assignee
深圳市韶音科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201810975515.1A external-priority patent/CN108873372B/zh
Priority claimed from CN201910009904.3A external-priority patent/CN109495809B/zh
Priority claimed from CN201920031804.6U external-priority patent/CN209267805U/zh
Application filed by 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 filed Critical 深圳市韶音科技有限公司
Publication of WO2020038478A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020038478A1/zh
Priority to US17/137,386 priority Critical patent/US11940670B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C11/00—Non-optical adjuncts; Attachment thereof
    • G02C11/10—Electronic devices other than hearing aids
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C11/00—Non-optical adjuncts; Attachment thereof
    • G02C11/06—Hearing aids
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G02C5/143—Side-members having special ear pieces
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G02C5/2218—Resilient hinges
    • G02C5/2254—Resilient hinges comprising elastic means other than coil spring
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G02C5/2281—Special hinge screws
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/02—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/02—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein
    • H04R1/028—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein associated with devices performing functions other than acoustics, e.g. electric candles
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/02—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein
    • H04R1/04—Structural association of microphone with electric circuitry therefor
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/06—Arranging circuit leads; Relieving strain on circuit leads
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1008—Earpieces of the supra-aural or circum-aural type
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1033—Cables or cables storage, e.g. cable reels
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1041—Mechanical or electronic switches, or control elements
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/105—Earpiece supports, e.g. ear hooks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1058—Manufacture or assembly
    • H04R1/1075—Mountings of transducers in earphones or headphones
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1083—Reduction of ambient noise
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/20—Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics
    • H04R1/22—Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics for obtaining desired frequency characteristic only 
    • H04R1/28—Transducer mountings or enclosures modified by provision of mechanical or acoustic impedances, e.g. resonator, damping means
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R25/00—Deaf-aid sets, i.e. electro-acoustic or electro-mechanical hearing aids; Electric tinnitus maskers providing an auditory perception
    • H04R25/65—Housing parts, e.g. shells, tips or moulds, or their manufacture
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/02—Details
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/02—Details
    • H04R9/025—Magnetic circuit
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/06—Loudspeakers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K1/00—Printed circuits
    • H05K1/02—Details
    • H05K1/0277—Bendability or stretchability details
    • H05K1/028—Bending or folding regions of flexible printed circuits
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K1/00—Printed circuits
    • H05K1/18—Printed circuits structurally associated with non-printed electric components
    • H05K1/189—Printed circuits structurally associated with non-printed electric components characterised by the use of a flexible or folded printed circuit
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1058—Manufacture or assembly
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2201/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones covered by H04R1/00 but not provided for in any of its subgroups
    • H04R2201/10—Details of earpieces, attachments therefor, earphones or monophonic headphones covered by H04R1/10 but not provided for in any of its subgroups
    • H04R2201/107—Monophonic and stereophonic headphones with microphone for two-way hands free communication
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2460/00—Details of hearing devices, i.e. of ear- or headphones covered by H04R1/10 or H04R5/033 but not provided for in any of their subgroups, or of hearing aids covered by H04R25/00 but not provided for in any of its subgroups
    • H04R2460/13—Hearing devices using bone conduction transducers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/06—Loudspeakers
    • H04R9/066—Loudspeakers using the principle of inertia
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to printed circuits covered by H05K1/00
    • H05K2201/05—Flexible printed circuits [FPCs]

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of glasses, and in particular, to glasses with speakers.
  • Speakers can have different product forms.
  • the speaker may be integrated on the glasses (sunglasses, swimming glasses, etc.), or may be fixed in or near the user's ear by a special structure (for example, an ear hook).
  • a special structure for example, an ear hook.
  • the complicated wiring greatly occupies the internal space of the product, and the unreasonable wire distribution will cause the wires to affect each other, which will cause abnormal noise and affect the sound quality of the speaker. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a more efficient wiring technology, simplify the speaker wiring, and improve the sound quality of the speaker.
  • An embodiment of the present specification provides a pair of glasses including: a spectacle frame; a spectacle leg, wherein the spectacle leg contains a control circuit or a battery; and a hinge assembly, which is used to connect the spectacle frame and the spectacle leg So that the spectacle frame and the spectacle legs can be relatively rotated around the rotating shaft component, and the rotating shaft component is provided with a rotating shaft cable channel in the axial direction; a connecting line is passed through the rotating shaft component.
  • a speaker component which includes an earphone core and a movement case for accommodating the earphone core, and the speaker component and The spectacle legs are connected, and the movement housing includes a housing panel facing the human body side and a housing back opposite to the housing panel; the control circuit or battery drives the earphone core to vibrate through the connecting cable to A sound is generated, and the vibration of the headphone core causes the housing panel and the back of the housing to vibrate, the vibration of the housing panel having a first phase, and the vibration of the back of the housing having a second phase Wherein vibration of the vibration frequency and the housing panel back of said housing at 2000Hz to 3000Hz, said first phase and said second phase difference between an absolute value of less than 60 degrees.
  • FIG. 1 is a structural module diagram of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a flexible circuit board according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is an exploded view of a partial structure of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a partial structural cross-sectional view of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a partial enlarged view of a portion F in FIG. 5 of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is an exploded view of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a nose pad in a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a spectacle frame and a spectacle lens in a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 9 of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of a connection line in a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a partial structural schematic diagram of a speaker B in FIG. 7 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of a partial structure of glasses in a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a speaker shaft assembly and a connecting wire according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a first rotating shaft in a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 16 is a partial exploded view of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 17 is a schematic structural diagram of an eyeglass frame and an eyeglass lens in a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing a partial structure of a temple of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a bone conduction speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a bone conduction speaker assembly provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 21 is a schematic structural diagram of another bone conduction speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of another bone conduction speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a shell of a bone conduction speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a speaker assembly provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 25 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 26 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2600 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2700 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2900 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 29 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3000 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of transmitting sound through air conduction according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the speaker module to implement the functions of a hearing aid.
  • a microphone such as a microphone that can pick up the sound of the surroundings of the user / wearer is added, and the sound is processed (or the electrical signal generated) is transmitted to the bone under a certain algorithm.
  • Conductive speaker component that is, the bone conduction speaker component can be modified to include the function of picking up ambient sounds, and after certain signal processing, the sound is transmitted to the user / wearer through the bone conduction speaker component part, thereby realizing the bone conduction hearing aid.
  • the algorithms mentioned here may include noise cancellation, automatic gain control, acoustic feedback suppression, wide dynamic range compression, active environment recognition, active noise reduction, directional processing, tinnitus processing, multi-channel wide dynamic range compression, and active howling A combination of one or more of suppression, volume control, etc.
  • FIG. 1 is a structural block diagram of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the speaker 100 may include at least a headphone core 102, an auxiliary function module 104, and a flexible circuit board 106.
  • the headphone core 102 may receive audio electrical signals and convert the audio signals into sound signals.
  • the flexible circuit board 106 provides electrical connections between different modules / components.
  • the flexible circuit board 106 may provide an electrical connection between the headphone core 102 and an external control circuit and auxiliary function module 104.
  • the earphone core 102 may include at least a magnetic circuit component, a vibration component, and a bracket for receiving the magnetic circuit component and the vibration component.
  • the magnetic circuit component is used to provide a magnetic field
  • the vibration component is used to convert an electrical signal input to the vibration component into a mechanical vibration signal, and thereby generate a sound.
  • the vibration assembly may include at least a coil and an internal lead.
  • the earphone core 102 further includes an external lead, which is capable of transmitting audio current to a coil in the vibration component.
  • One end of the external wire can be connected to the internal lead of the headphone core, and one end can be connected to the flexible circuit board of the speaker.
  • the bracket may have a buried wire groove, and the external wires and / or the internal wires may be partially disposed in the buried wire groove.
  • the auxiliary function module 104 is configured to receive auxiliary signals and perform auxiliary functions.
  • the auxiliary function module 104 may be a module for performing auxiliary functions different from the headphone core for receiving auxiliary signals.
  • converting an audio signal into a sound signal may be considered as a main function of the speaker 100, and other functions different from the main function may be considered as auxiliary functions of the speaker 100.
  • the auxiliary functions of the speaker 100 may include receiving a user and / or an ambient sound through a microphone, and controlling a playback process of the sound signal through a key, and the like.
  • the corresponding auxiliary function module can be a microphone, a key switch, etc., which can be set according to actual needs.
  • the auxiliary signal may be a combination of one or more of electric signals, optical signals, acoustic signals, and vibration signals related to auxiliary functions.
  • the speaker 100 further includes a movement case 108 for receiving the headphone core 102, the auxiliary function module 104 and the flexible circuit board 106.
  • the inner wall of the movement case 108 may be directly or indirectly connected to the vibration component in the earphone core.
  • the outer wall of the movement case 108 is connected to The user contacts and transmits the mechanical vibration of the vibration component to the auditory nerve through the bone, so that the human body hears the sound.
  • the speaker may include a headphone core 102, an auxiliary function module 104, a flexible circuit board 106, and a movement case 108.
  • the flexible circuit board 106 may be a flexible printed circuit (FPC), and is accommodated in an internal space of the movement case 108.
  • the flexible circuit board 106 can have high flexibility and can adapt to the internal space of the movement case 108.
  • the flexible circuit board 106 may include a first board body and a second board body. The flexible circuit board 106 can be bent at the first plate body and the second plate body to adapt to its position in the movement case 108 and the like.
  • FPC flexible printed circuit
  • the speaker 100 transmits sound through bone conduction.
  • the outer surface of the movement case 108 may have a conforming surface.
  • the fitting surface is an outer surface of the speaker 100 that is in contact with a human body when the user wears the speaker 100.
  • the speaker 100 can press the fitting surface against a preset area (the front of the tragus, the position of the skull, or the back of the auricle), thereby effectively transmitting vibration signals to the user's auditory nerve through the bones, and improving the sound quality of the speaker 100.
  • the conforming surface may conform to the back of the auricle.
  • the mechanical vibration signal is transmitted from the earphone core to the movement case, and is transmitted to the back of the auricle through the fitting surface of the movement case, and then the vibration signal is transmitted to the auditory nerve by the bone near the back of the auricle.
  • the bone near the back of the auricle is closer to the auditory nerve, which has a better conduction effect, which can improve the efficiency of the speaker 100 transmitting sound to the auditory nerve.
  • the speaker 100 further includes a fixing mechanism 110.
  • the fixing mechanism 110 is externally connected to the movement case 108 for supporting and maintaining the position of the movement case 108.
  • a battery assembly and a control circuit may be disposed in the fixing mechanism 110.
  • the battery component can provide power to any electronic component in the speaker 100.
  • the control circuit can control any functional component in the speaker 100, and the functional component includes, but is not limited to, a headphone core, an auxiliary function module, and the like.
  • the control circuit can be connected to the battery and other functional components through a flexible circuit board, and can also be connected to the battery and other functional components through wires.
  • the fixing mechanism 110 may be one or a combination of spectacle frames, hats, headwear, or other headwear.
  • the fixing mechanism 110 may be a spectacle frame.
  • a cavity is formed inside the spectacle frame, which can accommodate battery components, flexible circuit boards and control circuits.
  • the earphone core 102 may be located at the tail end of the spectacle legs, and located at the ear when the user wears the glasses, and provides a sound signal.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a flexible circuit board inside a movement case according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the flexible circuit board 44 includes at least a plurality of first pads 45 and a plurality of second pads (not shown in the figure).
  • the flexible circuit board 44 in FIG. 2 corresponds to the flexible circuit board 106 in FIG. 1. At least one first pad 45 of the first pads 45 is electrically connected to the auxiliary function module.
  • the at least one first pad 45 is connected to at least one of the at least one first pad 45 through the first flexible lead 47 on the flexible circuit board 44.
  • One of the second pads is electrically connected, and the at least one second pad is electrically connected to the headphone core (not shown in the figure) through an external wire (not shown in the figure).
  • At least another first pad 45 of the first pads 45 is electrically connected to an auxiliary signal wire, and the at least another first pad 45 and the auxiliary function module are connected to each other through the flexible circuit board 44.
  • the second flexible lead 49 is electrically connected.
  • At least one first pad 45 is electrically connected to the auxiliary function module, at least one second pad is electrically connected to the headphone core through an external wire, and then the at least one first pad is connected to the at least one first pad through a first flexible lead 47.
  • One of 45 is electrically connected to one of the at least one second pad, so that the external audio signal wire and the auxiliary signal wire are electrically connected to the headphone core and multiple auxiliary function modules through a flexible circuit board at the same time, which simplifies the wiring.
  • the audio signal wire may be a wire electrically connected to the headphone core and transmitting an audio signal to the headphone core.
  • the auxiliary signal wire may be a wire that is electrically connected to the auxiliary function module and performs signal transmission with the auxiliary function module.
  • the flexible circuit board 44 is provided with a plurality of pads 45 and two pads (not shown in the figure).
  • the disks 45 are located on the same side of the flexible circuit board 44 and are spaced apart. And the two pads are connected to corresponding two pads 45 of the plurality of pads 45 through a flexible lead 47 on the flexible circuit board 44.
  • the movement case 41 also contains two external wires, one end of each of the external wires is welded to the corresponding pad, and the other end is connected to the earphone core, so that the earphone core is connected to the pad through the external wire.
  • the auxiliary function module can be mounted on the flexible circuit board 44 and connected to other pads of the plurality of pads 45 through flexible leads 49 on the flexible circuit board 44.
  • a conducting wire is provided in the fixing mechanism 110 of the speaker 100, and the conducting wire includes at least an audio signal wire and an auxiliary signal wire.
  • the wires in the fixing mechanism 110 may be multiple, including at least two audio signal wires and at least two auxiliary signal wires.
  • the fixing mechanism 110 may be a spectacle frame, and the spectacle frame is connected to the movement case 41.
  • the wire may be a wire provided in the spectacle frame. One end of the plurality of spectacle frame wires is welded to the flexibility provided in the movement case 10. On the circuit board 44 or the control circuit board, the other end enters the inside of the movement case 41 and is soldered to the pad 45 on the flexible circuit board 44.
  • one end of two audio signal wires of a plurality of spectacle frame wires located in the movement case 41 is welded to two pads 45 welded by two flexible leads 47, and the other end can be directly or indirectly connected to the control
  • the two pads 45 are further connected to the headphone core through the welding of the flexible lead 49 and the two pads 46 and the welding of the two external wires to the pads, thereby transmitting audio signals to the headphone core.
  • auxiliary signal wires located in the movement case 41 is soldered to the solder pad 45 to which the flexible lead 49 is soldered, and the other end can be directly or indirectly connected to the control circuit board, so as to provide the control circuit (not (Shown in the figure) transfers auxiliary signals received and converted by auxiliary function modules.
  • a flexible circuit board 44 is provided in the movement case 41, and corresponding pads are further provided on the flexible circuit board 44 to lead the wires (not shown in the figure) into the movement case.
  • the 41 is soldered to the corresponding pad, and further connected to the corresponding auxiliary function module through the flexible lead 47 and the flexible lead 49 on the pad, thereby avoiding multiple auxiliary wires-all auxiliary functions directly connected to
  • the module makes the wiring in the movement case 41 complicated, thereby optimizing the wiring arrangement and saving the space occupied by the movement case 41; and the auxiliary device that directly connects multiple glasses frame leads
  • the function module is mounted, the middle part of the spectacle frame wire is suspended in the movement case 41, which easily causes vibration, which brings abnormal noise to affect the sound quality of the headphone core.
  • the spectacle frame wire is welded to the soft Further connecting the corresponding auxiliary function module to the sex circuit board 44 can reduce the situation that the wire is suspended and affect the quality of the headphone core, thereby improving the sound quality of the headphone core to a certain extent.
  • the flexible circuit board (also referred to as the flexible circuit board 44) may be further partitioned to divide the flexible circuit board into at least two regions. Each zone can be provided with an auxiliary function module, so that at least two auxiliary function modules can be provided on the flexible circuit board, and audio signal wires and auxiliary signal wires and at least two auxiliary function modules can be realized through the flexible circuit board. Between the lines.
  • the flexible circuit board may include at least a main circuit board and a first branch circuit board. The first branch circuit board is connected to the main circuit board and extends away from the main circuit board along one end of the main circuit board.
  • the auxiliary function module may include at least a first auxiliary function module and a second auxiliary function module.
  • a first auxiliary function module may be provided on the main circuit board, and a second auxiliary function module may be provided on the first branch circuit board.
  • a plurality of first pads may be provided on the main circuit board, and a second pad may be provided on the first branch circuit board.
  • the first auxiliary function module may be a key switch, and the key switch may be disposed on the main circuit board, and the first pad is provided corresponding to the key switch.
  • the second auxiliary function module may be a microphone.
  • the microphone is disposed on the first branch circuit board, and a second pad corresponding to the microphone is provided on the first branch circuit board.
  • the second flexible lead is used to connect the first pad corresponding to the key switch on the main circuit board and the second pad corresponding to the microphone on the first branch circuit board.
  • the key switch can be electrically connected to the microphone to make the key The switch can control or operate the microphone.
  • the flexible circuit board may further include a second branch circuit board, and the second branch circuit board is connected to the main circuit board and is far from the main circuit board along the main circuit board. The other end extends and is spaced from the first branch circuit board.
  • the auxiliary function module may further include a third auxiliary function module, and the third auxiliary function module is disposed on the second branch circuit board.
  • the plurality of first pads are disposed on the main circuit board, at least one of the second pads is disposed on the first branch circuit board, and the other second pads are disposed on the second branch.
  • the third auxiliary function module may be a second microphone.
  • the second branch circuit board extends perpendicular to the main circuit board.
  • the second microphone is mounted on the end of the second branch circuit board away from the main circuit board.
  • a plurality of pads are provided on the end of the main circuit board far from the second branch circuit board. unit.
  • the second auxiliary function module may be a first microphone 432a
  • the third auxiliary function module may be a second microphone 432b.
  • the first microphone 432a and the second microphone 432b can both be MEMS (micro-electromechanical system) microphone 432, which has a small working current, relatively stable performance, and high voice quality.
  • the two microphones 432 may be disposed at different positions of the flexible circuit board 44 according to actual needs.
  • the flexible circuit board 44 includes a main circuit board 441 (also referred to as a main circuit board) and a branch circuit board 442 (or a first branch circuit board) and a branch circuit board 443 (or a branch circuit board) connected to the main circuit board 441.
  • a main circuit board 441 also referred to as a main circuit board
  • a branch circuit board 442 or a first branch circuit board
  • a branch circuit board 443 or a branch circuit board
  • the branch circuit board 442 extends in the same direction as the main circuit board 441, the first microphone 432a is mounted on the end of the branch circuit board 442 away from the main circuit board 441, and the branch circuit board 443 and the main circuit board 441 Extending vertically, the second microphone 432b is mounted on the end of the branch circuit board 443 away from the main circuit board 441, and a plurality of pads 45 are disposed on the end of the main circuit board 441 away from the branch circuit board 442 and the branch circuit board 443.
  • the movement case 41 includes a peripheral side wall 411 and a bottom end wall 412 connected to one end surface of the peripheral side wall 411 to form an accommodation space with an open end.
  • the earphone core is placed in the accommodation space through the open end, the first microphone 432a is fixed on the bottom end wall 412, and the second microphone 432b is fixed on the peripheral side wall 411.
  • the branch circuit board 442 and / or the branch circuit board 443 may be appropriately bent to adapt to the position of the sound inlet hole corresponding to the microphone 432 on the movement case 41.
  • the flexible circuit board 44 can be disposed in the movement case 41 in a manner that the main circuit board 441 is parallel to the bottom end wall 412, so that the first microphone 432a can correspond to the bottom end wall 412 without the need for the main circuit board. 441 is bent. Since the second microphone 432b is fixed on the peripheral side wall 411 of the movement case 41, it is necessary to bend the second main circuit board 441.
  • the branch circuit board 443 can be located at an end away from the main circuit board 441.
  • the pad 45, the pad, the first microphone 432a, and the second microphone 432b may be disposed on the same side of the flexible circuit board 44, and the pad is disposed adjacent to the second microphone 432b.
  • the pads may be specifically disposed at the end of the branch circuit board 443 away from the main circuit board 441, and the same orientation as the second microphone 432b is provided at intervals, so as to be perpendicular to the orientation of the pad 45 as the branch circuit board 443 is bent .
  • the plate surface of the branch circuit board 443 may not be perpendicular to the plate surface of the main circuit board 441 after being bent, and may be determined according to the arrangement manner between the peripheral side wall 411 and the bottom end wall 412.
  • the other side of the flexible circuit board 44 is provided with a rigid support plate 4a for supporting the pad 45 and a microphone rigid support plate 4b.
  • the microphone rigid support plate 4b includes a rigid support plate 4b1 for supporting the first microphone 432a. And a rigid support plate 4b2 for supporting the pad 46 and the second microphone 432b together.
  • the rigid support plate 4a, the rigid support plate 4b1, and the rigid support plate 4b2 are mainly used to support the corresponding pads and the microphone 432, and therefore need to have a certain strength.
  • the materials of the three may be the same or different. Specifically, they may be polyimide films (PI), or other materials capable of supporting strength, such as polycarbonate and polyvinyl chloride.
  • the thickness of the three rigid support plates can be set according to the strength of the rigid support plate itself and the actual strength required by the pads 45, the pads, and the first microphone 432a and the second microphone 432b, which are not specified here. limited.
  • the rigid support plate 4a, the rigid support plate 4b1, and the rigid support plate 4b2 may be three different regions of the entire rigid support plate, or may be three independent entire bodies spaced apart from each other, which are not specifically limited herein.
  • the first microphone 432a and the second microphone 432b respectively correspond to two microphone assemblies (not shown in the figure).
  • the structure of the two microphone components is the same.
  • a sound inlet hole 413 is provided on the movement case 41.
  • the bone conduction speaker device is further provided at the movement case 41 and is integrally formed with the machine.
  • the annular blocking wall 414 on the inner surface of the core case 41 is disposed on the periphery of the sound inlet hole 413, and further defines an accommodation space (not shown in the figure) in communication with the sound inlet hole 413.
  • the flexible circuit board 44 may be disposed between the rigid support plate (eg, the rigid support plate 4a, the rigid support plate 4b1, and the rigid support plate 4b2) and the microphone 432, and corresponding to the microphone rigid support plate 4b.
  • a sound inlet hole 444 is provided at a position of the sound inlet hole 4b3 of the sound inlet hole 4b3.
  • the flexible circuit board 44 further extends away from the microphone 432 to connect with other functional elements or wires to achieve corresponding functions.
  • the rigid support plate 4b of the microphone also extends a distance from the microphone 432 along with the flexible circuit board.
  • a notch matching the shape of the flexible circuit board 44 is provided on the annular blocking wall 414 to allow the flexible circuit board 44 to extend from the accommodation space.
  • a sealant may be further filled in the notch to further improve the sealability.
  • the flexible circuit board 44 may include a main circuit board 445 and a branch circuit board 446, wherein the branch circuit board 446 may extend along an extending direction perpendicular to the main circuit board 445.
  • a plurality of pads 45 are disposed on the end of the main circuit board 445 away from the branch circuit board 446
  • a key switch is mounted on the main circuit board 445
  • the pads 46 are disposed on the end of the branch circuit board 446 away from the main circuit board 445.
  • the first auxiliary function module may be a key switch 431
  • the second auxiliary function module may be a microphone 432.
  • the board surface of the flexible circuit board 44 is disposed parallel to the bottom end wall 412 so that the key switch can be disposed toward the bottom end wall 412 of the movement case 41.
  • the headphone core may include a magnetic circuit component, a vibration component, an external wire, and a bracket.
  • the vibration component includes a coil and an inner lead
  • the external lead can transmit audio current to the coil in the vibration component.
  • One end of the external wire can be connected to the internal lead of the headphone core, and one end can be connected to the flexible circuit board of the speaker.
  • the bracket may have a buried wire groove, and at least a part of the external wire and / or the internal wire may be disposed in the buried wire groove.
  • the inner lead and the outer lead are soldered to each other, and the welding position may be located in the buried wire slot.
  • the earphone core includes a bracket 421, a coil 422, and an external wire 48.
  • the bracket 421 is used for supporting and protecting the entire headphone core structure.
  • the bracket 421 is provided with a buried wire slot 4211, which can be used to receive the line of the earphone core.
  • the coil 422 may be disposed on the bracket 421 and has at least one internal lead 423. One end of the internal lead 423 is connected to a main line in the coil 422 to lead the main line and transmit audio current to the coil 422 through the internal lead 423. .
  • One end of the external lead 48 is connected to the internal lead 423. Further, the other end of the external lead 48 may be connected to a control circuit (not shown) to transmit audio current to the coil 422 through the control circuit through the internal lead 423.
  • the length of the wire cannot be exactly the same as the length of the channel. There are extra length lines. However, if the extra length of the wire cannot be placed reasonably, it will vibrate with the vibration of the coil 422, thereby emitting abnormal sounds, affecting the sound quality of the headphone core.
  • At least one of the external lead 48 and the internal lead 423 can be wound and set in the buried wire slot 4211.
  • the welding position between the internal lead 423 and the external lead 48 can be set to the buried wire.
  • a portion of the outer lead 48 and the inner lead 423 near the welding position is wound in the buried wire groove 4211.
  • a sealant may be further filled in the buried groove 4211 to fix the wiring in the buried groove 4211.
  • a buried wire slot 4211 is provided on the bracket 421, so that at least one of the external lead wire 48 and the internal lead wire 423 is wound and set in the buried wire slot 4211 to accommodate the excess length of the wire, thereby weakening it in the channel.
  • the vibration generated during it reduces the influence of the abnormal sound caused by the vibration on the sound quality emitted by the headphone core.
  • the bracket 421 includes an annular main body 4212, a support flange 4213, and an outer blocking wall 4214.
  • the annular main body 4212, the support flange 4213, and the outer blocking wall 4214 can be obtained by integral molding.
  • the ring-shaped body 4212 is disposed on the inner side of the entire bracket 421 and is used to support the coil 422. Specifically, the cross-section of the ring-shaped body 4212 in a direction perpendicular to the radial direction of the ring is consistent with the coil 422, and the coil 422 is disposed at an end of the ring-shaped body 4212 facing the inner portion of the movement case, and the inner side wall of the ring-shaped body 4212 and The outer side wall can be flush with the inner side wall and the outer side wall of the coil 422, so that the inner side wall of the coil 422 and the inner side wall of the ring body 4212 are coplanar, and the outer side wall of the coil 422 and the outer side wall of the ring body 4212 are coplanar. .
  • the supporting flange 4213 is protruded on the outer side wall of the ring-shaped body 4212 and extends to the outside of the ring-shaped body 4212. Specifically, the support flange 4213 may extend to the outside in a direction perpendicular to the outer wall of the ring-shaped body 4212. Wherein, the support flange 4213 may be provided at a position between two ends of the ring-shaped body 4212. In this embodiment, the support flange 4213 may protrude around the outer side wall of the ring-shaped body 4212 to form a ring-shaped support flange 4213. In other embodiments, only a part of the outer side wall of the annular main body 4212 may be formed in a protruding manner according to requirements.
  • the outer baffle wall 4214 is connected to the support flange 4213 and is spaced apart from the ring body 4212 along the side of the ring body 4212.
  • the outer baffle wall 4214 can be sleeved on the periphery of the ring-shaped body 4212 and / or the coil 422 at intervals. Specifically, it can be partially sleeved on the periphery of the ring-shaped body 4212 and the coil 422 according to actual needs, and partly on the ring-shaped body 4212 periphery.
  • a portion of the outer blocking wall 4214 near the buried wire groove 4211 is sleeved on the periphery of a part of the annular main body 4212.
  • the outer baffle wall 4214 is disposed on a side of the support flange 4213 away from the movement case.
  • the outer side wall of the ring-shaped body 4212 and the side wall of the support flange 4213 far from the movement case and the inner side wall of the outer blocking wall 4214 jointly define the buried groove 4211.
  • a wiring channel 424 is provided on the ring-shaped body 4212 and the supporting flange 4213, and the inner lead 423 extends into the buried groove 4211 through the wiring channel 424.
  • the routing channel 424 includes a sub routing channel 4241 on the ring-shaped body 4212 and a sub routing channel 4242 on the support flange 4213.
  • the sub-routing channel 4241 is provided through the inner side wall and the outer side wall of the annular main body 4212, and a wiring opening 42411 communicating with one end of the sub-routing channel 4241 is provided on the side of the annular main body 4212 near the coil 422.
  • a wiring opening 42412 communicating with the other end of the sub routing passage 4241 is provided; the sub routing passage 4242 penetrates the support flange 4213 in a direction toward the outside of the movement case, and
  • the supporting flange 4213 is provided with a wiring opening 42421 on one side facing the inner part of the movement case, which communicates with one end of the sub wiring passage 4242, and a wiring connecting the other end of the sub wiring passage 4242, which is away from the inside of the movement case, Mouth 42422.
  • the wiring opening 42412 and the wiring opening 42421 communicate with each other through a space between the support flange 4213 and the ring-shaped body 4212.
  • the inner lead 423 can enter the wiring opening 42411, extend along the sub-routing channel 4241, and exit from the wiring opening 42412 to enter the area between the ring-shaped body 4212 and the support flange 4213, and further from the wiring opening 42421 enters the sub-travel channel 4242, and extends into the buried groove 4211 after passing through the trace opening 42422.
  • a slot 42141 is provided at the top of the outer baffle wall 4214, and the external wire 48 can extend into the buried wire slot 4211 through the slot 42141.
  • One end of the external lead 48 is disposed on the flexible circuit board 44, and the flexible circuit board 44 is specifically disposed on a side of the earphone core that faces the inside of the movement case.
  • the support flange 4213 is further extended to a side of the outer blocking wall 4214 away from the annular main body 4212 to form an outer edge. Further, the outer edge surrounds the inner side wall of the movement case. Specifically, the outer edge of the support flange 4213 is provided with a slot 42131, so that the external wire 48 located on the side of the earphone core facing the inside of the movement case can extend through the slot 42131 to the support flange 4213. Facing the outer side of the movement case, it further extends to the slot 42141, and enters the buried slot 4211 through the slot 42141.
  • an inner side wall of the movement case is provided with one end on the flexible circuit board 44 side, and the other end communicates with the guide groove 416 of the slot 42131 extending in a direction toward the outside of the movement case, so that external wires 48 extends from the flexible wiring board to the second wiring groove 3331 through the guide groove 416.
  • the bracket 421 further includes two side walls 4215 spaced apart from each other along the circumferential direction of the ring body 4212 and connecting the ring body 4212, the support flange 4213, and the outer wall 4214, and further the two side walls 4215 A buried wire slot 4211 is defined therebetween.
  • the two side retaining walls 4215 are oppositely disposed on the support flange 4213 and protrude toward the outer side of the movement case along the support flange 4213.
  • the side of the two side retaining walls 4215 facing the annular body 4212 is connected to the outer side wall of the annular body 4212, and the side far from the annular body 4212 terminates at the outer side wall of the outer retaining wall 4214, and the wiring opening 42422 and the opening
  • the groove 42141 is defined between the two side retaining walls 4215, so that the inner lead 423 passing through the wiring opening 42422 and the outer wire 48 entered through the slot 42141 extend into the buried wire groove 4211 defined by the two side retaining walls 4215. among.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the speaker may be glasses.
  • the fixing mechanism may be a spectacle frame.
  • the fixing mechanism may have at least one rotating shaft component, which is used to connect the spectacle frame and the spectacle legs, the spectacle frame and the spectacle legs can rotate around the rotating shaft component, and the rotating shaft component has a rotating shaft routing channel arranged along the axis. .
  • a connecting wire may be provided in the fixing mechanism.
  • the connecting wire is an electric connecting wire.
  • the connecting wire is penetrated in the rotating shaft routing channel, and the two ends respectively extend into the spectacle frame and the spectacle leg.
  • a control circuit and a battery component may be respectively accommodated in the temples on both sides, and a connecting wire in the spectacle frame is electrically connected to the control circuit and the battery component.
  • connection line may include the audio signal line and the auxiliary signal line.
  • the connecting wire can be electrically connected to the flexible circuit board (ie, the flexible circuit board 106) inside the movement case (ie, the movement case 108), and the earphone core (ie, the earphone core 102) and auxiliary functions through the flexible circuit board.
  • the modules ie, the auxiliary function module 104) are electrically connected.
  • the spectacles of the present application may be spectacles worn to correct vision and protect eyes in the daily life and work of people, or a certain circuit structure and electronics are further added to the glasses. Components, etc., to further achieve specific functions through these circuit structures and electronic components.
  • the glasses in this application may be smart glasses, virtual reality glasses, holographic glasses, augmented reality glasses, glasses with other functional structures (such as glasses with bone conduction headphones or air conduction headphones, etc.).
  • the spectacle frame may include: a spectacle frame 11, a nose pad 12, a spectacle lens 13, and a spectacle leg 15.
  • the spectacle frame 11 is used to carry at least part of the spectacle lenses 13, and the nose pad 12 is used to support the spectacles on the bridge of the user's nose when the user wears them.
  • the nose pad 12 is disposed in the middle of the spectacle frame 11 and is integrally formed with the spectacle frame 11.
  • the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12 are usually formed separately.
  • the middle part of the spectacle frame 11 is provided with a structure connected to the nose pad 12.
  • the nose pad 12 is installed on the connection structure of the spectacle frame 11. .
  • the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12 are integrally formed into a single structure.
  • a corresponding mold can be used to integrally form the mold by injection molding or the like.
  • the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12 in this embodiment do not need to be mounted further after being formed, so that the manufacturing process of the spectacles can be simplified.
  • the spectacle lens 13 also adopts an integrated design, and the spectacle lens 13 is fixed by the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12 in a snap-fit manner.
  • the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12 are respectively provided with a structure for clamping the spectacle lens 13.
  • the integrally designed spectacle lens 13 is directly connected to the integral molding through the corresponding clamping structure.
  • the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12 are integrally formed, and the spectacle lens 13 is also integrally designed, so that the entire spectacle structure is simple and the manufacturing process of the spectacles can be simplified.
  • the spectacle lens 13 includes a top-side edge 131 and two outer edges 132 that are connected to both ends of the top-side edge 131 and are disposed away from the nose pad 12, and each of the outer edges 132 is respectively provided with a first buckle.
  • the spectacle frame 11 is provided with a first mounting groove 111 for receiving the top side edge 131 and at least a part of the outer edge 132, and a first buckling groove 112 communicating with the first mounting groove 111 and for receiving the first buckle 1321.
  • the top edge 131 is located on the upper side of the spectacle lens 13, the outer edge is located on both sides of the lens 13 near the user's ear, and the top edge 131 and the two outer edges 132 are connected to each other.
  • the first mounting groove 111 is provided on the side of the spectacle frame 11 facing the spectacle lens 13 and has a size matching the top side edge 131 and the two outer edges 132 of the corresponding spectacle lens 13 so that the spectacle lens 13 can pass the top side
  • the edge 131 and at least a part of the outer edge 132 are mounted in the first mounting groove 111 and further mounted on the eyeglass frame 11.
  • the first buckle 1321 is formed by further extending at least part of the outer edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 to both sides away from the nose pad 12, and the first buckle groove 112 is corresponding to the first buckle in the first mounting groove 111.
  • the position of 1321 is formed to be recessed in a direction away from the lens 13.
  • the shape and size of the first buckle groove 112 are matched with the first buckle 1321, so that the spectacle lens 13 can be further mounted on the eyeglass frame 11 by snapping the first buckle 1321 into the first buckle groove 112.
  • the spectacle lens 13 can be fixed to the spectacle frame 11 more firmly.
  • the spectacle lens 13 further includes an inner edge 133 abutting the nose pad 12, and the nose pad 12 is provided with a second mounting groove 121 for receiving the inner edge 133.
  • the spectacle lens 13 includes a left spectacle lens and a right spectacle lens, and the inner edge 133 of the spectacle lens 13 is disposed at the connection point and the vicinity of the connection point between the left spectacle lens and the right spectacle lens.
  • the second mounting groove 121 is disposed opposite to the first mounting groove 111 so that opposite sides of the spectacle lens 13 are respectively received and fixed in the accommodation space formed by the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12.
  • the two sides of the inner edge 133 are respectively provided with second buckle positions 1331, and the nose pad 12 is further provided with a second buckle position connected to the second mounting groove 121 and used to receive the second buckle position 1331.
  • Slot 122 is provided on the two sides of the inner edge 133.
  • the inner edge 133 includes two parts connected to each other, which are respectively disposed on a side of the left eyeglass lens facing the right eyeglass lens and a side of the right eyeglass lens facing the left eyeglass lens.
  • the nose pad 12 is also divided into two parts, which are respectively supported on the left and right nose bridges of the user when being worn by the user. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the number of the second buckle slots 122 and the second buckle slots 1331 are also two.
  • the shape and size of the second buckle 1331 are matched with the corresponding second buckle slots 122, so that the second buckle 1331 is respectively installed in the corresponding second buckle slots 122.
  • the spectacle lens 13 is provided with an inner edge 133 near both sides of the second fastening position 1331, so that both sides of the second fastening position 1331 can be installed in the second mounting groove 121, so that the spectacle lens 13 can be It is more firmly fixed to the nose pad 12.
  • the spectacle lens 13 is mounted on the spectacle frame 11 and the nose pad 12 through the top edge 131, the outer edge 132, the inner edge 133, and the first buckle 1321 and the second buckle 1331, respectively.
  • the spectacle lens 13 is further provided with ventilation holes 134.
  • the number of the ventilation holes may be two, and the spectacle lenses 13 on the left and right sides are respectively disposed near the top edge 131.
  • the ventilation holes 134 are provided so that when the user wears the glasses, the inner and outer sides of the spectacle lens 13 can achieve air circulation, so as to reduce the phenomenon of fogging of the spectacle lens 13 caused by local overheating caused by user movement and the like.
  • FIG. 7 is an exploded view of a speaker according to some embodiments of the present application
  • FIG. 8 is a structure of a nose pad cover in an embodiment of the glasses of the present application.
  • the nose pad 12 includes a connection portion 123 connected to the eyeglass frame 11 on the user side or away from the user's side of the first mounting groove 111 in the wearing state, and a distance from the eyeglass frame 11 on the connection portion 123.
  • Two support portions 124 connected in an inverted Y shape to the connection portion 123 on the side, the support portion 124 is used to support the glasses on the bridge of the user's nose when worn.
  • the connecting portion 123 is integrally connected with the spectacle frame 11, and when the user wears the connecting portion 123, the connecting portion 123 is disposed on a side of the first mounting groove 111 close to the user.
  • An I-shaped hook 1241 protrudes from a side of each support portion 124 facing the user's nose bridge, and the glasses further include a nose pad cover 14 detachably sleeved on the hook 1241.
  • the nose pad cover 14 can be made of soft rubber.
  • the number of I-shaped hooks 1241 may be two, corresponding to the left and right nose bridges of the user, respectively.
  • the nose pad 14 includes two sleeve bodies 141 and a connecting portion 142 connecting the two sleeve bodies 141.
  • the connecting portion 142 is connected above the bridge of the user's nose.
  • the sleeve body 141 is correspondingly provided with an I-shaped accommodating groove 1411 matching the hook 1241, and a side of the sleeve body 141 facing the user's nose bridge may further be provided with a non-slip portion 1412 composed of a plurality of grooves.
  • the nose pad 14 is detachably provided, thereby facilitating cleaning and replacement of the nose pad 14.
  • a side of the two support portions 124 facing away from the hook 1241 is protrudingly provided with a strip-shaped rib 1242, and the strip-shaped rib 1242 cooperates with the two support portions 124 to form a second mounting groove.
  • the strip-shaped ribs 1242 are protruded along the edge of the two support portions 124 away from the spectacle lens 13, thereby forming a second mounting groove 121 that receives the inner edge 133 of the spectacle lens 13.
  • the strip-shaped convex rib 1242 is further recessed to form a second buckling slot 122.
  • the spectacle frame further includes an spectacle leg 15, a functional component 16, and a connecting wire 17.
  • the temple 15 includes a first temple 151 and a second temple 152
  • the functional component 16 includes a first functional component 161 and a second functional component 162.
  • first spectacle leg 151 and the second spectacle leg 152 are connected to the spectacle frame 11, respectively, and the first functional component 161 and the second functional component 162 are disposed on the first spectacle leg 151 and the second spectacle leg 152, respectively. At least one cavity is respectively disposed on the temple 15 for receiving the corresponding functional component 16.
  • the connecting line 17 is disposed in the first mounting groove 111 and is interposed between the bottom of the first mounting groove 111 and the top side edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 and further extends to the first spectacle leg 151 and the second spectacle leg 152.
  • the first functional component 161 and the second functional component 162 are electrically connected.
  • the functional components 16 respectively provided on the two temples 15 need to be electrically connected through the connecting wire 17 so that the glasses can achieve a specific function.
  • the first functional component 161 is a battery component
  • the second functional component 162 is a control circuit component.
  • the control circuit component is connected to the battery component through a connection line 17 so that the battery component provides power to the control circuit component. From the control circuit components to achieve specific functions.
  • the connecting wire 17 is disposed in the first mounting groove 111 along the top side edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 and is accommodated in the first mounting groove 111 and the top side edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13. So that the connecting wire 17 is neither exposed on the outer surface of the glasses nor takes up extra space.
  • the connecting line 17 may further extend along the outer edge 132 of the spectacle lens 13 in the first mounting groove 111.
  • the spectacle frame 11 and the first spectacle leg 151 and the second spectacle leg 152 may further be provided with a connecting cable channel, so that the connecting wire 17 can be passed through the corresponding cable channel by the first mounting groove of the glass frame 11.
  • 111 enters the first temple 151 and the second temple 152 to connect the first functional component 161 and the second functional component 162.
  • connection line 17 has a function of electrical connection. In other embodiments, the connection line 17 may also have a function of mechanical connection.
  • the first functional component 161 and the second functional component 162 are respectively disposed on the first temple 151 and the second temple 152, and the connecting wire 17 electrically connecting the first function component 161 and the second function component 162 is provided.
  • the first mounting groove 111 receiving the top side edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 on the spectacle frame 11 so that the connection line 17 is interposed between the bottom of the first mounting groove 111 and the top side edge 131 of the spectacle lens and further extends To the first spectacle legs 151 and the second spectacle legs 152, so that the connecting wire 17 is not exposed, and there is no need to add extra space for the setting of the connecting wire 17, so that the beauty and lightness of the glasses can be maintained.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of an eyeglass frame and spectacle lens in an embodiment of the glasses of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 9.
  • the connecting wire 17 includes a wire body 171 and a wire protection sleeve 172 that is disposed around the periphery of the wire body 171.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the wire protective sleeve 172 matches the cross-sectional shape of the first mounting groove 111 so that the wire protective sleeve 172 is held in the first mounting groove 111 in a surface contact manner.
  • the wire protection sleeve 172 is made of soft rubber, so that the connecting wire 17 can be bent to match the shape of the first mounting groove 111. It is easy to understand that the wire body 171 is thin, and if it is directly installed in the first mounting groove 111, the contact area with the bottom of the first mounting groove 111 is small, and it is difficult to be firmly fixed therein.
  • a wire protection sleeve 172 wrapped around the wire body 171 is further provided to protect the wire body 171 on the one hand, and to increase the connection wires 17 and 17 by adjusting the surface area of the wire protection sleeve 172 on the other hand.
  • the contact area of the first mounting groove 111 is used to securely fix the wire body 171 in the first mounting groove 111.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the first mounting groove 111 is a shape such that the wire protective sleeve 172 can be held in the first mounting groove 111 with a large-area surface contact.
  • it may be U-shaped, rectangular, or wavy, and is not specifically limited herein.
  • the shape of the side of the wire protective sleeve 172 facing the bottom of the first mounting groove 111 corresponds to the above shape, so that the wire protective sleeve 172 can be directly or indirectly attached to the bottom of the first mounting groove 111.
  • an adhesive layer 18 is provided between the line protective sleeve 172 and the spectacle frame 11, so that the line protective sleeve 172 is fixed in the first installation groove 111 through the adhesive layer 18.
  • the adhesive layer 18 may be disposed on the bottom of the first installation groove 111, or may be further extended to both sides on the side wall near the bottom of the first installation groove 111, so that the adhesive layer 18 can be wound and protected.
  • the sleeve 172 is used to more firmly fix the connecting wire 17 in the first mounting groove 111.
  • the cross-section of the first mounting groove 111 is rectangular, and the bottom of the first mounting groove 111 and the side of the line protective sleeve 172 facing the bottom of the first mounting groove 111 are both flat, and the adhesive layer 18 It is a double-sided adhesive layer disposed between the two.
  • a side of the wire protective sleeve 172 facing the top side edge 131 of the eyeglass lens 13 is provided with a protrusion 1721 corresponding to the wire body 171, and the top side edge 131 of the eyeglass lens 13 is provided for The avoidance groove 1311 receiving the protrusion 1721.
  • the cross section of the wire body 171 may be circular, and the wire protective sleeve 172 may be flush with the wire body 171 on the side of the wire body 171 facing the bottom of the first mounting groove 111, and the wire body 171 faces away from the first mounting groove 111.
  • One side of the bottom still shows the shape of the wire body 171, so that a corresponding convex portion 1721 is formed.
  • the top side edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 needs to be further disposed in the first mounting groove 111.
  • the top side edge 131 is further provided with an escape groove 1311 for receiving the protrusion 1721, so that the The connecting wire 17 installed in a mounting groove 111 is at least partially accommodated in the avoidance groove 1311 corresponding to the top side edge 131.
  • the protruding portion 1721 is located in the middle region of the line protective sleeve 172 along the width direction of the line protective sleeve 172 to form abutting portions 1722 on both sides of the protruding portion 1721, and the two abutting portions 1722 and the avoidance groove 1311 are respectively formed.
  • the top-side edges 131 on both sides abut.
  • the width direction of the wire protective sleeve 172 refers to a direction perpendicular to the direction of the wire protective sleeve 172 along the first mounting groove 111, and is specifically a direction indicated by W in FIG. 10.
  • the depth of the first mounting groove 111 is limited. If the top edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 is flush with the convex portion 1721 of the connecting wire 17, or the wire protective sleeve 172 and the wire body 171 face away from the first mounting groove If one side of the bottom of the 111 is arranged flush with the wire body 171, the insertion depth of the top side edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 in the first mounting groove 111 is reduced, which is not conducive to the stable installation of the spectacle lens 13 in the spectacle frame 11.
  • the top edge 131 of the spectacle lens 13 avoids part of the connecting line 17 through the avoidance groove 1311, so that the top edge 131 can further extend toward the bottom of the first mounting groove 111 relative to the avoidance groove 1311 and Abutting with the abutting portions 1722 on both sides of the protruding portion 1721 can reduce the space occupied by the connecting wire 17 in the first mounting groove 111 to a certain extent, so that the spectacle lens 13 can be installed deeper in the first
  • the mounting groove 111 is used to improve the stability of the spectacle lens 13 in the spectacle frame 11.
  • the spectacle frame 11 is thin, and at least part of the convex portion 1721 is exposed outside the first mounting groove 111 to reduce the space of the spectacle frame occupied by the connecting wire 17, thereby reducing the first mounting groove 111. To improve the stability of the spectacle frame 11.
  • FIG. 12 is a partial structural schematic diagram of part B in FIG. 7.
  • the first buckle 1321 includes a first sub-edge 13211, a second sub-edge 13212, and a third sub-edge 13213.
  • the first sub-edge 13211 is disposed adjacent to the top-side edge 131
  • the second sub-edge 13212 is located away from the top-side edge 131 and is opposite to the first sub-edge 13211
  • the third sub-edge 13213 is disposed between the first sub-edge 13211 and the first sub-edge 13211.
  • the side of the two sub-edges 13212 that is far from the spectacle lens 13 connects the first sub-edge 13211 and the second sub-edge 13212.
  • the line protective sleeve 172 further extends into the first buckling groove 112 along the first sub-edge 13211.
  • the wire protective sleeve 172 is held in the first installation groove 111 and extended to the first buckling groove 112 to be hidden in the eyeglass frame 11, so that when the user removes and attaches the eyeglass lens 13 during use, the wire protective sleeve 172 will not be exposed after the spectacle lens 13 is removed to maintain the beauty of the glasses.
  • the line protective sleeve 172 when the line protective sleeve 172 extends toward the first buckling groove 112, it ends at a connection between the first sub-edge 13211 and the third sub-edge 13213.
  • the wire protection sleeve 172 may also continue to extend with the wire body 171 without being cut off, as long as the wire protection sleeve 172 is not exposed when the eyeglass lens 13 is removed.
  • FIG. 13 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of a partial structure of an embodiment of the glasses of the present application.
  • the glasses in this embodiment further include a shaft assembly 19.
  • the number of the rotating shaft components 19 is two, which are respectively used to connect the spectacle frame 11 and the two spectacle legs 15 so that the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle legs 15 can be relatively rotated around the rotating shaft component 19.
  • the shaft assembly 19 is provided with a shaft cable routing channel 191 in the axial direction, and the connecting wire 17 runs through the shaft cable routing channel 191 and extends to the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle legs 15 respectively.
  • one end directly extends to one spectacle leg 15 and the other end enters the spectacle frame 11 and further extends to the other spectacle leg along the first mounting groove 111. 15, and further electrically connect the two functional components 16 respectively located in the two temples 15.
  • connection wire 17 near the shaft routing channel may not include a wire protection sleeve 172.
  • the rotating shaft routing channel 191 may pass through the rotating shaft assembly 19.
  • the rotating shaft assembly 19 is provided with a rotating shaft cable channel 191 in the axial direction, and the connecting wire 17 located at the connection point between the spectacle frame 11 and the temple 15 passes through the rotating shaft cable channel 191 so that When folding with the temples 15, the connecting wire 17 located in the rotating shaft routing channel 191 will only rotate with a certain amount with the rotation of the rotating shaft assembly 19, so as to reduce the folding and squeezing of the connecting wire 17, thereby It plays a certain role in protecting the connection line 17, improves the stability of the connection line 17, and prolongs the service life of the connection line 17.
  • the inner diameter of the rotating shaft cable passage 191 in this embodiment is larger than the outer diameter of the connecting wire 17.
  • the inner diameter of the rotating shaft routing channel 191 may be twice the outer diameter of the connecting wire 17.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a hinge assembly and a connecting line in an embodiment of the glasses of the present application.
  • the rotation shaft assembly 19 includes a first rotation shaft 192, and two ends of the first rotation shaft 192 are respectively connected to the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle legs 15.
  • the rotation shaft routing channel 191 is provided along the axial direction of the first rotation shaft 192, and the rotation shaft routing channel 191 communicates with the outside through a wiring opening 1921 provided on at least one end surface of the first rotating shaft 192, and the connecting wire 17 extends to the spectacle frame 11 or the temple 15 through the wiring opening 1921.
  • the first rotation shaft 192 may be rotatably connected to one of the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle leg 15 and fixedly connected to the other one, so that the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle leg 15 are around the first rotation axis. 192 turns the connection.
  • the rotating shaft routing channel 191 is disposed in the first rotating shaft 192, and further communicates with the outside through the wiring opening 1921.
  • the rotating shaft routing channel 191 penetrates at least one end surface of the first rotating shaft 192 to form a routing port 1921 of the rotating shaft routing channel 191, so that the connecting wire 17 can pass through the rotating shaft routing channel through at least one end surface of the first rotating shaft 192.
  • Reference numeral 191 extends to the spectacle frame 11 or the spectacle leg 15. It is easy to understand that the periphery of the end surface of the first rotating shaft 192 has a large movable space, and the connecting line 17 extending from the end surface of the first rotating shaft 192 can be accommodated in the movable space.
  • the rotation shaft 192 is rotationally connected to the corresponding spectacle frame 11 or spectacle leg 15.
  • connection line 17 near the wiring opening 1921 on the end surface follows the first rotation shaft.
  • a certain degree of torsion occurs due to the rotation of 192, the movable space can be appropriately buffered, and the torsion can be changed to movement, thereby further reducing the degree of torsion of the connecting wire 17 and improving the stability of the connecting wire 17.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a first rotating shaft in an embodiment of the glasses of the present application.
  • the cable routing port 1921 includes a first cable routing port 19211 and a second cable routing port 19212, and is disposed on both ends of the first rotation shaft 192.
  • the rotation axis routing channel 191 passes through the two cable routing ports 1921 and 1921, respectively.
  • the connecting wire 17 penetrates both end surfaces of the first rotating shaft 192 and extends to the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle leg 15 through the first and second wiring openings 19211 and 19212, respectively.
  • connection line 17 at the connection between the eyeglass frame 11 and the temple 15 is provided in the rotation axis routing channel 191 in the first rotation shaft 192 and passes through both end surfaces of the first rotation shaft 192 respectively Extending from the shaft routing channel 191.
  • the connection line 17 extending from the both end surfaces of the first rotation shaft 192 is only rotated when the relative rotation occurs between the eyeglass frame 11 and the temple 15 There is no movement or small twist without deformation.
  • the wiring port 1921 includes a first wiring port 19213 and a second wiring port 19214.
  • the first wiring opening 19213 is provided on the end surface of the first rotating shaft 192
  • the second wiring opening 19214 is provided on the side wall of the first rotating shaft 192, so that one end of the rotating shaft routing channel 191 passes through the first running along the axial direction.
  • the wire opening 19213 penetrates the end surface of the first rotating shaft 192, and the other end penetrates the side wall of the first rotating shaft 192 through the second wiring opening 19214, and further communicates with the outside.
  • the connecting wire 17 passes through the first wiring opening 19213 and the second wiring opening. 19214 extends to the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle legs 15 respectively.
  • the first rotation shaft 192 is fixedly connected to one of the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle leg 15 provided near the second cable opening 19214, and is connected to the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle leg 15 near the first cable opening 19213. Set the other to turn the connection. That is, the first rotation shaft 192 is rotatably connected to one of the spectacle frame 11 or the temple 15 at a wire opening 1921 provided on the end surface, and the first rotation shaft 192 is connected to the glasses at a wire opening 1921 provided on the side wall. The other of the frame 11 or the temple 15 is fixedly connected.
  • the first rotating shaft 192 is close to the spectacle frame 11 at the first wiring opening 19213 and is rotatably connected to the spectacle frame 11.
  • the first rotating shaft 192 is close to the spectacle leg 15 at the second wiring opening 19214 and is The temples 15 are fixedly connected.
  • the relative rotation between the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle leg 15 will cause the connection line 17 to occur at the first routing port 19213.
  • the end surface of the first rotating shaft 192 has a large space for movement.
  • the twist is a movement or a small twist, without squeezing or pulling the connecting line, so as to improve the stability of the connecting line and extend the service life of the connecting line.
  • the first rotating shaft 192 is fixedly connected to the temple 15 at the second wiring port 19214. It is easy to understand that when the relative rotation occurs between the glasses frame 11 and the temple 15, the temple 11 and the first shaft 192 Synchronization is maintained. Therefore, the connecting wire 17 in the shaft routing channel 191 extending into the temple 11 through the second wire opening 19214 will not be twisted, squeezed, or pulled. Therefore, at this time, whether the second wiring port 19214 is provided on the end surface of the first rotation shaft 192 or on the side wall of the first rotation shaft 192, the relative rotation between the eyeglass frame 11 and the temple 15 will not affect this.
  • the connecting wire 17 at the place causes the above-mentioned twisting, squeezing, pulling, and the like.
  • first rotation shaft 192 and the temple 15 are rotationally connected at the second wiring opening 19214, when the relative rotation occurs between them and the connecting wire 17 is moved, the second wiring will be subjected to the second wiring.
  • the side wall of the first rotation shaft 192 is restrained at the mouth 19214, so that the connecting wire 17 is squeezed between the side wall of the first rotation shaft 192 and the temple 15.
  • first rotating shaft 192 is close to the temple 15 at the first cable opening 19213 and is rotationally connected to the temple 15, the first rotating shaft 192 is close to the glasses frame 11 at the second cable opening 19214 and fixedly connected to the glasses frame 11.
  • connection line 17 in the shaft cable routing channel 191 and near the first cable port 19213 and the second cable port 19214 still occurs only slightly. Twist or move.
  • the rotating shaft assembly 19 further includes a second rotating shaft 193 coaxial with and spaced from the first rotating shaft 192.
  • the second rotating shaft 193 is disposed on a side of the first rotating shaft 192 close to the first wiring opening 19213.
  • the second rotating shaft 193 may also be disposed on a side of the first rotating shaft 192 near the second wiring opening 19214.
  • the eyeglass frame 11 includes first lugs 113.
  • the number of the first lugs 113 is two, which are respectively disposed at two ends of the eyeglass frame 11 connecting the two eyeglass legs 15 and respectively protrude toward each other.
  • the temple 15 includes a second lug 1501 and a third lug 1502 disposed at intervals.
  • the second lugs 1501 and the third lugs 1502 face the ends of the spectacle frame 11 to which the spectacle legs 15 are located.
  • the second lugs 1501 and the third lugs 1502 are connected to a side far from the user's head, thereby making the glasses more overall and more beautiful in appearance.
  • the second lugs 1501 and the third lugs 1502 that are spaced apart are formed by providing a groove in the middle of the end of the spectacle leg 15 facing the spectacle frame 11.
  • first rotating shaft 192 and the second rotating shaft 193 that are close to each other are connected to the first lug 113, and the ends of the first rotating shaft 192 and the second rotating shaft 193 that are away from each other are respectively connected to the second lug 1501 and the third
  • the lugs 1502 are connected to hold the first lug 113 between the second lug 1501 and the third lug 1502.
  • the first wiring opening 19213 is provided on an end surface of the first rotating shaft 192 near the second rotating shaft 193, and the second wiring opening 19214 is provided on the first rotating shaft 192 near the second protrusion.
  • the first rotating shaft 192 is rotatably connected with the first lug 113 and is fixedly connected with the second lug 1501.
  • one end of the connecting wire 17 in the rotating shaft routing channel 191 extends from the first routing opening 19213 and passes through the interval between the first rotating shaft 192 and the second rotating shaft 193.
  • the first lug 113 is provided with a wiring channel communicating with the first wiring port 19213, so that the connecting wire 17 further enters the eyeglass frame 11 through the first lug 113.
  • the other end of the connecting wire 17 in the shaft routing channel 191 extends from the second wiring port 19214.
  • the third lug 1502 is provided with a wiring channel communicating with the second wiring port 19214, so that the connecting wire 17 can further enter the temple 15 through the wiring channel of the third lug 1502. .
  • the second wiring opening 19214 may be a through hole that is disposed on a side wall of the first rotating shaft 192 and does not penetrate the end of the first rotating shaft 192 and communicates with the rotating shaft routing channel 191. In this embodiment, the second wiring opening 19214 is further penetrated along the side wall of the first rotating shaft 192 to an end of the first rotating shaft 192 away from the first wiring opening 19213. It is easy to understand that the second routing port 19214 in this embodiment has a larger space, so that when the connection line 17 moves here for some reasons, the restriction on the connection line 17 can be further reduced, further Damage caused by blocking of the side wall of the first rotating shaft 192 is reduced.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a spectacle frame and a spectacle lens in an embodiment of the glasses of the present application.
  • the first and second lugs 113 and 1501 are coaxially provided with a first receiving hole 1131 and a second receiving hole 15011, respectively.
  • the first receiving hole 1131 and the second receiving hole 15011 are disposed coaxially.
  • the size is set to allow the first rotation shaft 192 to be inserted into the first accommodation hole 1131 from the outside of the temple 15 through the second accommodation hole 15011, and to make the first rotation shaft 192 and the second accommodation hole 15011 interference fit and the first accommodation shaft
  • a receiving hole 1131 is fitted with clearance.
  • the second accommodating hole 15011 is a through hole penetrating through the second lug 1501
  • the first accommodating hole 1131 corresponds to the second accommodating hole 15011 and penetrates at least part of the first lug 113.
  • the inner diameter of the first receiving hole 1131 is larger than the second receiving hole 15011, and the outer diameter of the first rotating shaft is between the first receiving hole 1131 and the second receiving hole 15011, so that the first rotating shaft 192 and
  • the temple 15 is fixedly connected, and is rotatably connected to the temple 11, so that the temple 11 can be folded or opened by rotating around the first rotation shaft 192.
  • the first and second lugs 113 and 1502 are coaxially provided with a third receiving hole 1132 and a fourth receiving hole 15021, respectively, wherein the third receiving hole 1132 and the fourth receiving hole 1502 are coaxially provided.
  • the size of the receiving hole 15021 is set to allow the second rotating shaft 193 to be inserted into the third receiving hole 1132 from the outside of the temple 15 through the fourth receiving hole 15021, and make the second rotating shaft 193 and the third receiving hole 1132 interfere with each other.
  • the second rotation shaft 193 fits with the fourth accommodation hole 15021 in a clearance fit with the fourth accommodation hole 15021 and fits the fourth accommodation hole 15021 in an interference fit.
  • the third receiving hole 1132 and the fourth receiving hole 15021 are both coaxially disposed with the first receiving hole 1131 and the second receiving hole 15011.
  • the third receiving hole 1132 penetrates at least part of the first lug 113.
  • the first receiving hole 1131 and the third receiving hole 1132 are coaxially and penetrated.
  • the first lug 113 of the spectacle frame 11 is provided with a routing channel communicating with the first wiring opening 19213, and the first receiving hole 1131 and the third receiving hole 1132 are respectively provided.
  • the two sides of the wiring channel located in the first lug 113 penetrate through the wiring channel.
  • the fourth accommodating hole 15021 is provided through the third lug 1502.
  • the outer diameter of the second rotating shaft 193 is between the inner diameter of the third receiving hole 1132 and the fourth receiving hole 15021, and the inner diameter of the third receiving hole 1132 is larger than the fourth receiving hole 15021, or The inner diameter of the four receiving holes 15021 is larger than the third receiving hole 1132, so that the second rotating shaft 193 is fixedly connected to the temple 15 and is rotationally connected to the spectacle frame 11, or the second rotating shaft 193 is fixedly connected to the spectacle frame 11 and The spectacle legs 15 are rotationally connected, so that the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle legs 15 can be rotated around the first rotation axis 192 to be folded or opened.
  • the second rotating shaft 193 may be a solid shaft, and its diameter is smaller than the diameter of the first rotating shaft 192. In the wearing state, the second rotating shaft 193 is located on the upper side of the temple 15, and the first rotating shaft 192 is located on the lower side of the temple 15.
  • the rotating shaft routing channel 191 is disposed inside the first rotating shaft 192, the outer diameter of the first rotating shaft 192 is relatively large, which is not conducive to meeting the aesthetic requirements of users. Therefore, in this embodiment, a second rotating shaft 193 having a smaller outer diameter is further provided, so that when a user wears glasses, the second rotating shaft 193 is disposed on an upper part that is easily found, and the first rotating shaft 192 is disposed on a part that is not easily.
  • the first rotating shaft 192 and the second rotating shaft 193 may be other cases.
  • the second rotating shaft 193 may also be a hollow shaft, and the diameter of the second rotating shaft 193 may be larger than that of the first rotating shaft 192.
  • the diameter, or in the wearing state, the second rotating shaft 193 is located on the lower side of the temple 15, the first rotating shaft 192 is located on the upper side of the temple 15, and the like, which is not limited herein.
  • connection between the end surface 1922 of the first rotation shaft 192 for setting the first wire opening 19213 and the inner wall surface 1923 of the first rotation shaft 192 for defining the shaft routing channel 191 is arc-shaped. It is easy to understand that when the rotation between the spectacle frame 11 and the spectacle leg 15 is performed through the rotation shaft assembly 19, the first rotation shaft 192 and the spectacle frame 11 are rotationally connected, which will drive the connection line at the first wiring port 19213.
  • connection between the above-mentioned end surface 1922 of the first rotation shaft 192 and the inner wall surface 1923 is designed in an arc shape, which can prevent the connection line 17 at the first wiring opening 19213 from moving and connecting with the first rotation shaft 192 When the contact is too sharp, the connection wire 17 is cut during contact, thereby further protecting the connection wire 17.
  • connection between the end face of the first rotation shaft 192 for setting the second cable opening 19214 and the inner wall surface 1923 of the first rotation shaft 192 for defining the rotation shaft routing channel 191 is also arc-shaped.
  • the ground can also further protect the connection line 17 in this way.
  • the branch circuit board may further include a third pad and a third flexible circuit board. Such deformations are all within the protection scope of this application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a bone conduction speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly 200 in FIG. 19 corresponds to the headphone core 102 and the movement case 108 in FIG. 1, and the earphone case 220 corresponds to the movement case 108 in FIG. 1.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly 200 may include a magnetic circuit assembly 210, a coil 212, a vibration transmitting sheet 214, a connector 216, and an earphone housing 220.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 210 may include a first magnetic element 202, a first magnetically permeable element 204, and a second magnetically permeable element 206.
  • the earphone housing 220 may include a housing panel 222, a housing back 224, and a housing side 226.
  • the housing back surface 224 is located on a side opposite to the housing panel 222 and is respectively disposed on both end surfaces of the housing side surface 226.
  • the casing panel 222, the casing back surface 224, and the casing side surface 226 form an integrated structure with a certain accommodation space.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 210, the coil 212, and the vibration transmitting sheet 214 are fixed inside the earphone housing 220.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly 200 may further include a housing support 228, the vibration transmitting sheet 214 may be connected to the earphone housing 220 through the housing support 228, and the coil 212 may be fixed on the housing support 228 and through the housing support 228 Drive the casing 220 to vibrate.
  • the housing bracket 228 may be a part of the earphone housing 220 or a separate component, which is directly or indirectly connected to the interior of the earphone housing 220.
  • the housing bracket 228 may be fixed on the inner surface of the housing side 226.
  • the housing bracket 228 may be adhered to the earphone housing 220 by glue, and may also be fixed to the housing 220 by stamping, injection molding, snap-fitting, riveting, screwing or welding.
  • connection manner of the casing panel 222, the casing back surface 224, and the casing side surface 226 can be used to ensure that the earphone casing 220 has greater rigidity.
  • the housing panel 222, the housing back 224, and the housing side 226 may be integrally formed.
  • the housing back surface 224 and the housing side surface 226 may be a one-piece structure.
  • the outer shell panel 222 and the outer shell side 226 can be directly fixed by glue, or fixed by means of snapping, welding or screwing.
  • the glue may be a glue with strong viscosity and high hardness.
  • the casing panel 222 and the casing side surface 226 may be an integrally formed structure.
  • the casing back surface 224 and the casing side surface 226 may be directly fixed and fixed by glue, or may be fixed by snapping, welding, or screwing.
  • the housing panel 222, the housing back surface 224, and the housing side surface 226 are independent components, and the three can be performed by one or any combination of glue, snap, welding, or screw connection.
  • Fixed connection For example, the shell panel 222 and the shell side 226 are connected by glue, and the shell back surface 224 and the shell side 226 are connected by snapping, welding, or screwing. Or the shell back surface 224 and the shell side surface 226 are connected by glue, and the shell panel 222 and the shell side surface 226 are connected by snapping, welding or screwing.
  • the shells described in this application can be made by different assembly methods.
  • the housing may be a one-piece molding method, a split combination method, or a combination of the two.
  • the different splits can be fixed with glue or fixed by snapping, welding or screwing.
  • FIGS. 20-24 describe examples of assembling methods of several cases.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly mainly includes a magnetic circuit assembly 2210 and a housing.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2210 may include a first magnetic element 2202, a first magnetically permeable element 2204, and a second magnetically permeable element 2206.
  • the housing may include a housing panel 2222, a housing back 2224, and a housing side 2226.
  • the housing side surface 2226 and the housing back surface 2224 are made in an integrated manner, and the housing panel 2222 is connected to one end of the housing side surface 2226 by a combination of parts.
  • the method of combining the pieces includes using glue to fix or fix the shell panel 2222 to one end of the side 2226 of the shell by means of snapping, welding or screwing.
  • the case panel 2222 and the case side 2226 may be made of different, the same, or partially the same materials.
  • the shell panel 2222 and the shell side 2226 are made of the same material, and the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 2000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 4000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 6000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the material of the earphone housing 220 is greater than 8000 MPa.
  • the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 12000 MPa, more preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 15000 MPa, and even more preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 18000 MPa.
  • the shell panel 2222 and the shell side 2226 are made of different materials, and the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 4000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 6000 MPa, more preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 8000 MPa, and even more preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 12000 MPa.
  • the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 15000 MPa, and even more preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 18000 MPa.
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 includes, but is not limited to, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer (AcrYlonitrile butadiene stYrene, ABS), polystyrene (PolYstYrene, PS), high Impact polystyrene (High impact polYstYrene, HIPS), polypropylene (PolYpropYlene, PP), polyethylene terephthalate (PolYethYlene terephthalate, PET), polyester (PolYester, PES), polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC ), Polyamide (PolYamides, PA), Polyvinyl chloride (PolYvinYlchloride, PVC), Polyurethane (PolYurethanes
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 is any combination of glass fiber, carbon fiber, and materials such as polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) and polyamide (PolYamides, PA).
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 may be made of carbon fiber and polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) according to a certain ratio.
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 may be made of carbon fiber, glass fiber and polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) according to a certain ratio.
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 may be made of glass fiber and polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) according to a certain ratio, and glass fiber and polyamide (PolYamides, PA) may also be used. Made by mixing in a certain proportion.
  • the casing panel 2222, the casing back surface 2224, and the casing side surface 2226 form an integrated structure with a certain accommodation space.
  • the vibration transmitting sheet 2214 is connected to the magnetic circuit assembly 2210 through a connecting member 2216.
  • the two sides of the magnetic circuit assembly 2210 are connected to the first magnetically permeable element 2204 and the second magnetically permeable element 2206, respectively.
  • the vibration transmitting sheet 2214 is fixed to the inside of the integrated structure through a housing support 2228.
  • the housing side 2226 has a step structure for supporting the housing support 2228.
  • the shell panel 2222 may be fixed to the shell bracket 2228 and the shell side 2226 at the same time, or may be separately fixed to the shell bracket 2228 or the shell side 2226.
  • the housing side 2226 and the housing bracket 2228 may be integrally formed.
  • the housing bracket 2228 may be directly fixed on the housing panel 2222 (for example, by means of glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing).
  • the fixed shell panel 2222 and the shell bracket 2228 are then fixed to the side of the shell (for example, by means of glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing).
  • the case bracket 2228 and the case panel 2222 may be integrally formed.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly mainly includes a magnetic circuit assembly 2240 and a housing.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2240 may include a first magnetic element 2232, a first magnetically conductive element 2234, and a second magnetically conductive element 2236.
  • the vibration transmitting plate 2244 is connected to the magnetic circuit assembly 2240 through a connecting member 2246.
  • This embodiment is different from the embodiment provided in FIG. 20 in that the housing bracket 2258 and the housing side 2256 are integrally formed.
  • the housing panel 2252 is fixed on the side of the housing side 2256 that is connected to the housing bracket 2258 (for example, by means of glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing), and the housing back 2254 is fixed on the other side of the housing side 2256 (for example, (Through glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing).
  • the shell bracket 2258 and the shell side 2256 are separate structures, and the shell panel 2252, the shell back 2254, and the shell bracket 2258 and the shell side 2256 are all pasted and snapped together by glue. , Welding or threaded connection for fixed connection.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly in this embodiment mainly includes a magnetic circuit assembly 2270 and a housing.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2270 may include a first magnetic element 2262, a first magnetically conductive element 2264, and a second magnetically conductive element 2266.
  • the vibration transmitting plate 2274 is connected to the magnetic circuit assembly 2270 through a connecting member 2276.
  • This embodiment is different from the embodiment provided in FIG. 21 in that the housing panel 2282 and the housing side 2286 are integrally formed.
  • the case back 2284 is fixed to the side of the case side 2286 opposite to the case panel 2282 (for example, by means of glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing).
  • the shell bracket 2288 is fixed on the shell panel 2282 and / or the shell side 2286 by means of glue sticking, snap-fitting, welding or screwing.
  • the housing bracket 2288, the housing panel 2282, and the housing side 2286 are integrally formed structures.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a shell of a bone conduction speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the case 700 may include a case panel 710, a case back 720, and a case side 730.
  • the shell panel 710 is in contact with the human body, and transmits the vibration of the bone conduction speaker component to the human auditory nerve.
  • the amplitude and phase of the vibration of the housing panel 710 and the housing back 720 remain the same or substantially the same (the side 730 of the housing does not compress air and therefore does not Generating sound leakage), so that the first sound leakage signal generated by the housing panel 710 and the second sound leakage signal generated by the back surface 720 of the housing can be superimposed on each other.
  • the superimposition can reduce the amplitude of the first leaky sound wave or the second leaky sound wave, thereby achieving the purpose of reducing the sound leakage of the housing 700.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a portion with a frequency greater than 500 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 600 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 800 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 1000 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 2000 Hz. More preferably, the certain frequency range includes at least a portion whose frequency is greater than 5000 Hz. More preferably, the certain frequency range includes at least a portion having a frequency greater than 8000 Hz. Further preferably, the certain frequency range includes at least a portion having a frequency greater than 10000 Hz.
  • the rigidity of the shell of the bone conduction speaker assembly can affect the amplitude and phase of the vibration of different parts of the shell (for example, the shell panel, the back of the shell, and / or the side of the shell), thereby affecting the bone conduction speaker assembly. Sound leakage.
  • the shell panel and the back of the shell can maintain the same or substantially the same amplitude and phase of vibration at a higher frequency, thereby significantly reducing bone Conductive sound leakage from headphones.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 1000 Hz-2000 Hz, a frequency between 1100 Hz-2000 Hz, a frequency between 1300 Hz-2000 Hz, and a frequency between 1500 Hz-2000 Hz.
  • the higher frequency mentioned herein may include a frequency of not less than 2000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 2000 Hz and 3000 Hz, a frequency between 2100 Hz and 3000 Hz, a frequency between 2300 Hz and 3000 Hz, and a frequency between 2500 Hz and 3000 Hz.
  • Frequency between 2700Hz-3000Hz, or between 2900Hz-3000Hz.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency of not less than 4000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 4000 Hz and 5000 Hz, a frequency between 4100 Hz and 5000 Hz, a frequency between 4300 Hz and 5000 Hz, a frequency between 4500 Hz and 5000 Hz, and 4700 Hz.
  • Frequency between -5000Hz, or between 4900Hz-5000Hz.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency not less than 6000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 6000 Hz-8000 Hz, a frequency between 6100 Hz-8000 Hz, a frequency between 6300 Hz-8000 Hz, and a frequency between 6500 Hz-8000 Hz, Frequency between 7000Hz-8000Hz, frequency between 7500Hz-8000Hz, or frequency between 7900Hz-8000Hz.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency not less than 8000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 8000 Hz-12000 Hz, a frequency between 8100 Hz-12000 Hz, a frequency between 8300 Hz-12000 Hz, and a frequency between 8500 Hz-12000 Hz, Frequency between 9000Hz-12000Hz, frequency between 10000Hz-12000Hz, or frequency between 11000Hz-12000Hz.
  • the vibration amplitude of the shell panel and the back of the shell are the same or substantially the same means that the ratio of the vibration amplitude of the shell panel and the back of the shell is within a certain range.
  • the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the shell panel and the back of the case is between 0.3 and 3.
  • the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the shell panel and the back of the case is between 0.4 and 2.5, preferably, the amplitude of the vibration between the shell panel and the back of the shell.
  • the ratio of the vibration amplitude is between 0.5 and 1.5, more preferably, the ratio of the vibration amplitude of the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.6 and 1.4, and more preferably, the ratio of the vibration amplitude of the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.7 and 1.2.
  • the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.75 and 1.15, more preferably, the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.8 and 1.1, more preferably, the case panel and The ratio of the amplitude of the vibration on the back of the case is between 0.85 and 1.1, and further preferably, the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration on the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.9 and 1.05.
  • the vibrations of the housing panel and the back of the housing may be expressed by other physical quantities capable of characterizing the amplitude of the vibrations. For example, the sound pressure generated by the shell panel and the back of the shell at one point in the space can be used to characterize the vibration amplitude of the shell panel and the back of the shell.
  • Maintaining the same or substantially the same vibration phase between the shell panel and the back of the shell means that the difference between the vibration phases of the shell panel and the back of the shell is within a certain range.
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the case panel and the back of the case is between -90 ° and 90 °, preferably, the difference of the vibration phase of the case panel and the back of the case is between -80 ° and 80 °, preferably,
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the housing panel and the back of the housing is between -60 ° and 60 °, preferably, the difference between the vibration phase of the housing panel and the back of the housing is between -45 ° and 45 °, and more preferably, the housing
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the case is between -30 ° and 30 °, more preferably, the difference of the vibration phase of the case panel and the back of the case is between -20 ° and 20 °, and more preferably, the case The difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the case is between -12 ° and 12 °. More preferably, the case The difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the case is between -10 ° and 10 °, more preferably, the difference of the vibration phase between the case panel and the back of the case is between -8 ° and 8 °, and more preferably, the case The difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the housing is between -6 ° and 6 °, more preferably, the housing panel The difference between the vibration phase on the back of the case is between -5 ° and 5 °. More preferably, the difference between the vibration phase on the case panel and the back of the case is between -4 ° and 4 °.
  • the difference between the case panel and the The difference between the vibration phase on the back of the housing is between -3 ° and 3 °, and more preferably, the difference between the vibration phase on the back of the housing panel and the back of the housing is between -2 ° and 2 °.
  • the difference between the vibration phases on the back of the case is between -1 ° and 1 °. Further preferably, the difference between the vibration phases on the back of the case panel and the back of the case is 0 °.
  • the above description of the bone conduction speaker component is only a specific example, and should not be regarded as the only feasible implementation solution.
  • the side of the case, the back of the case, and the case bracket may be a one-piece structure. Such deformations are all within the protection scope of this application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the speaker assembly 300 may include a first magnetic element 302, a first magnetically permeable element 304, a second magnetically permeable element 306, a first vibration plate 308, a voice coil 310, a second vibration plate 312, and a vibration panel. 314.
  • the speaker module 300 corresponds to the magnetic circuit module 210 in FIG. 19. .
  • the magnetic circuit assembly may include a first magnetic element 302, a first magnetically permeable element 304, and a second magnetically permeable element 306.
  • the magnetic circuit component can generate a first full magnetic field (also referred to as "total magnetic field of the magnetic circuit component" or "first magnetic field").
  • the magnetic element described in this application refers to an element that can generate a magnetic field, such as a magnet.
  • the magnetic element may have a magnetization direction, and the magnetization direction refers to a direction of a magnetic field inside the magnetic element.
  • the first magnetic element 302 may include one or more magnets, and the first magnetic element may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the magnet may include a metal alloy magnet, ferrite, or the like.
  • the metal alloy magnet may include neodymium iron boron, samarium cobalt, aluminum nickel cobalt, iron chromium cobalt, aluminum iron boron, iron carbon aluminum, or the like, or a combination thereof.
  • the ferrite may include barium ferrite, ferrite, ferromanganese ferrite, lithium manganese ferrite, or the like, or a combination thereof.
  • the lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 304 may be connected to the upper surface of the first magnetic element 302.
  • the second magnetically conductive element 306 can be connected to the first magnetic element 302.
  • the permeable magnet mentioned here can also be called a magnetic field concentrator or an iron core.
  • the magnetizer can adjust the distribution of a magnetic field (for example, a second magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 302).
  • the magnetizer may include an element processed from a soft magnetic material.
  • the soft magnetic material may include a metal material, a metal alloy, a metal oxide material, an amorphous metal material, and the like, such as iron, an iron-silicon alloy, an iron-aluminum alloy, a nickel-iron alloy, and iron-cobalt Series alloy, low carbon steel, silicon steel sheet, silicon steel sheet, ferrite, etc.
  • the magnetizer may be processed by one or more combinations of casting, plastic working, cutting processing, powder metallurgy, and the like.
  • Casting can include sand casting, investment casting, pressure casting, centrifugal casting, etc .; plastic processing can include one or more combinations of rolling, casting, forging, stamping, extrusion, drawing, etc .; cutting processing can include turning, milling , Planing, grinding, etc.
  • the processing method of the magnetizing means may include 3D printing, a numerically controlled machine tool, and the like.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetically permeable element 304, the second magnetically permeable element 306, and the first magnetic element 302 may include one or more combinations such as bonding, snapping, welding, riveting, and bolting.
  • the first magnetic element 302, the first magnetically permeable element 304, and the second magnetically permeable element 306 may be configured as an axisymmetric structure.
  • the axisymmetric structure may be a ring structure, a columnar structure, or other axisymmetric structures.
  • a magnetic gap may be formed between the first magnetic element 302 and the second magnetically permeable element 306.
  • the voice coil 310 may be disposed in the magnetic gap.
  • the voice coil 310 may be connected to the first vibration plate 308.
  • the first vibration plate 308 may be connected to the second vibration plate 312, and the second vibration plate 312 may be connected to the vibration panel 314.
  • the voice coil 310 is located in a magnetic field formed by the first magnetic element 302, the first magnetically permeable element 304, and the second magnetically permeable element 306, and will be subjected to ampere force.
  • the ampere force drives the voice coil 310 to vibrate, and the vibration of the voice coil 310 will drive the vibration of the first vibration plate 308, the second vibration plate 312, and the vibration panel 314.
  • the vibration panel 314 transmits the vibration to the auditory nerve through tissues and bones, so that a person hears sound.
  • the vibration panel 314 may be in direct contact with human skin, or may be in contact with the skin through a vibration transmission layer composed of a specific material.
  • the magnetic induction lines passing through the voice coil are not uniform and divergent.
  • magnetic leakage may be formed in the magnetic circuit, that is, more magnetic lines of induction leak out of the magnetic gap and fail to pass through the voice coil, thereby reducing the magnetic induction strength (or magnetic field strength) at the position of the voice coil and affecting the speaker components The sensitivity. Therefore, the speaker assembly 300 may further include at least one second magnetic element and / or at least one third magnetically conductive element (not shown).
  • the at least one second magnetic element and / or the at least one third magnetically permeable element can suppress the leakage of the magnetic induction lines and restrict the shape of the magnetic induction lines passing through the voice coil, so that more magnetic induction lines pass through the sound as horizontally and densely as possible.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2100 may include a first magnetic element 2102, a first magnetically permeable element 2104, a second magnetically permeable element 2106, and a second magnetic element 2108.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the second magnetic element 2108 may include any one or several magnets described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 may include a first magnet
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may include a second magnet
  • the first magnet and the second magnet may be the same or different.
  • the first magnetically permeable element 2104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 2106 may include any one or several magnetically permeable materials described in this application.
  • the processing method of the first magnetically permeable element 2104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 2106 may include any one or several processing methods described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104 may be provided as an axisymmetric structure.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104 may be a cylinder, a rectangular parallelepiped, or a hollow ring (for example, the cross-section is the shape of a racetrack).
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and the first magnetically permeable element 2104 may be coaxial cylinders containing the same or different diameters.
  • the second magnetically permeable element 2106 may be a groove-type structure.
  • the groove structure may include a U-shaped cross section (as shown in FIG. 24).
  • the groove-shaped second magnetically permeable element 2106 may include a bottom plate and a side wall.
  • the bottom plate and the side wall may be integrally formed.
  • the side wall may be formed by extending the bottom plate in a direction perpendicular to the bottom plate.
  • the bottom plate may be connected to the side wall by any one or several connection methods described in this application.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be set in a ring shape or a sheet shape.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be annular.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may include an inner ring and an outer ring.
  • the shape of the inner ring and / or the outer ring may be a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, a quadrangle or any other polygon.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be composed of multiple magnets arranged. Both ends of any one of the plurality of magnets may be connected to two ends of adjacent magnets or there may be a certain distance. The spacing between the plurality of magnets may be the same or different.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be formed by equidistantly arranging two or three sheet-shaped magnets.
  • the shape of the sheet-shaped magnet may be a fan shape, a quadrangular shape, or the like.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be coaxial with the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104.
  • the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2102 may be connected to the lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 2104.
  • the lower surface of the first magnetic element 2102 can be connected to the bottom plate of the second magnetically conductive element 306.
  • a lower surface of the second magnetic element 2108 is connected to a side wall of the second magnetic conductive element 2106.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and / or the second magnetic element 2108 may include one of bonding, snapping, welding, riveting, bolting, and the like, or Multiple combinations.
  • a magnetic gap is formed between the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104 and the inner ring of the second magnetic element 2108.
  • a voice coil 2128 may be disposed in the magnetic gap.
  • the height of the second magnetic element 2108 and the voice coil 2128 relative to the bottom plate of the second magnetically conductive element 2106 are equal.
  • the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and the second magnetic element 2108 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • the magnetic circuit component 2100 may generate a first full magnetic field (also may be referred to as "total magnetic field of the magnetic circuit component” or "first magnetic field”), and the first magnetic element 2102 may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the first full magnetic field is a magnetic field generated by all components in the magnetic circuit assembly 2100 (for example, the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and the second magnetic element 2108). Together.
  • the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap (also referred to as magnetic induction intensity or magnetic flux density) is greater than the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field in the magnetic gap.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may generate a third magnetic field, and the third magnetic field may increase the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field at the magnetic gap.
  • the third magnetic field increasing the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field here means that the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap is greater than that when there is a third magnetic field (ie, the second magnetic element 2108 is present).
  • the first full magnetic field when the third magnetic field is present ie, the second magnetic element 2108 is not present.
  • the magnetic circuit component indicates a structure including all magnetic elements and magnetically permeable elements
  • the first total magnetic field indicates a magnetic field generated by the entire magnetic circuit component
  • the second magnetic field and the third magnetic field ...
  • the N-th magnetic field represents the magnetic field generated by the corresponding magnetic element.
  • the magnetic elements that generate the second magnetic field may be the same or different.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is equal to or greater than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 302 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a in the figure), and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is The inner ring of the two magnetic elements 2108 points toward the outer ring (as shown by the direction b in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2102, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is deflected 90 degrees in a clockwise direction).
  • the included angle between the direction of the first full magnetic field and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the second magnetic element 2108, the angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2102 and the direction of the magnetization of the second magnetic element 2108 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the second magnetic component 2108 can increase the total magnetic flux in the magnetic gap in the magnetic circuit component 2100, thereby increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • the originally scattered magnetic induction lines will converge to the position of the magnetic gap, further increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2600 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit component 2600 differs from the magnetic circuit component 2100 in that it may further include at least one conductive element (for example, a first conductive element 2118, a second conductive element 2120, and a third conductive element 2122). .
  • the conductive element may include a metal material, a metal alloy material, an inorganic non-metal material, or other conductive materials.
  • Metal materials may include gold, silver, copper, aluminum, etc .; metal alloy materials may include iron-based alloys, aluminum-based alloy materials, copper-based alloys, zinc-based alloys, etc .; inorganic non-metal materials may include graphite and the like.
  • the conductive element may be in a sheet shape, a ring shape, a mesh shape, or the like.
  • the first conductive element 2118 may be disposed on an upper surface of the first magnetically conductive element 2104.
  • the second conductive element 2120 can be connected to the first magnetic element 2102 and the second magnetic conductive element 2106.
  • the third conductive element 2122 may be connected to a sidewall of the first magnetic element 2102.
  • the first magnetically conductive element 2104 may protrude from the first magnetic element 2102 to form a first recessed portion, and the third conductive element 2122 is disposed in the first recessed portion.
  • the first conductive element 2118, the second conductive element 2120, and the third conductive element 2122 may include the same or different conductive materials.
  • the first conductive element 2118, the second conductive element 2120, and the third conductive element 2122 may be connected to the first magnetically conductive element 2104, the second magnetically conductive element 2106, and / or by any one or more of the connection methods described in this application.
  • a magnetic gap is formed between the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, and the inner ring of the second magnetic element 2108.
  • a voice coil 2128 may be disposed in the magnetic gap.
  • the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and the second magnetic element 2108 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • the conductive element can reduce the inductive reactance of the voice coil 2128. For example, if the voice coil 2128 passes a first alternating current, a first alternating induced magnetic field is generated near the voice coil 2128.
  • the first alternating induced magnetic field will cause inductive reactance of the voice coil 2128 and hinder the movement of the voice coil 2128.
  • a conductive element for example, a first conductive element 2118, a second conductive element 2120, and a third conductive element 2122
  • the conductive element can be induced by the first alternating induced magnetic field.
  • Second alternating current A third alternating current in the conductive element can generate a second alternating induced magnetic field near the third alternating current.
  • the second alternating induced magnetic field is opposite to the first alternating induced magnetic field in the direction, which can weaken the first alternating current. Changing the induced magnetic field, thereby reducing the inductive reactance of the voice coil 2128, increasing the current in the voice coil, and improving the sensitivity of the speaker component.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2700 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 differs from the magnetic circuit assembly 2500 in that the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 may further include a third magnetic element 2110, a fourth magnetic element 2112, a fifth magnetic element 2114, and a third guide.
  • the third magnetic element 2110, the fourth magnetic element 2112, the fifth magnetic element 2114, the third magnetically permeable element 2116, and / or the sixth magnetic element 2124, and the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be provided as coaxial circular cylinders.
  • the upper surface of the second magnetic element 2108 is connected to the seventh magnetic element 2126, and the lower surface of the second magnetic element 2108 may be connected to the third magnetic element 2110.
  • the third magnetic element 2110 can be connected to the second magnetically conductive element 2106.
  • the upper surface of the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be connected to the third magnetically conductive element 2116.
  • the fourth magnetic element 2112 can be connected to the second magnetically permeable element 2106 and the first magnetic element 2102.
  • the sixth magnetic element 2124 can be connected to the fifth magnetic element 2114, the third magnetically permeable element 2116, and the seventh magnetic element 2126.
  • the third magnetically conductive element 2116, the sixth magnetic element 2124, and the seventh magnetic element 2126 may form a magnetic circuit and a magnetic gap.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2102 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is changed from the sixth The outer ring of the magnetic element 2124 points toward the inner ring (as shown in the direction g in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2102, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is deflected 270 degrees in the clockwise direction).
  • the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 and the magnetization direction of the fourth magnetic element 2112 may be the same in the same vertical direction.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the sixth magnetic element 2124, the angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • an included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2102 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is changed from the seventh The lower surface of the magnetic element 2126 points to the upper surface (as shown in the direction f in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2102, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is deflected 360 degrees in a clockwise direction). In some embodiments, the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 and the magnetization direction of the third magnetic element 2110 may be opposite.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the seventh magnetic element 2126, the angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the third magnetically permeable element 2116 can close the magnetic circuit generated by the magnetic circuit component 2700, so that more magnetic induction lines are concentrated in the magnetic gap, thereby achieving a place where the magnetic leakage is suppressed and the magnetic gap is increased. Magnetic induction strength, and the effect of improving the sensitivity of speaker components.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2900 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2900 may include a first magnetic element 2902, a first magnetically permeable element 2904, a first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and a second magnetic element 2908.
  • the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 may be connected to the lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 2904, and the second magnetic element 2908 may be connected to the first magnetic element 2902 and the first full magnetic field changing element 2906.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetic element 2902, the first magnetically permeable element 2904, the first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and / or the second magnetic element 2908 may be based on any one or several connection manners described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 2902, the first magnetically permeable element 2904, the first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and / or the second magnetic element 2908 may form a magnetic circuit and a magnetic gap.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2900 may generate a first full magnetic field, and the first magnetic element 2902 may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap is greater than that of the second magnetic field.
  • the second magnetic element 2908 may generate a third magnetic field, which may increase the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field at the magnetic gap.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 may not be higher than 90 degrees.
  • the included angle between the direction of the first full magnetic field and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the second magnetic element 2908, the angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2902 and the direction of the magnetization of the second magnetic element 2908 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 vertically upward (as shown in the direction of a). The outer ring is pointed toward the inner ring (as shown by the direction c in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2902, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is deflected 270 degrees clockwise).
  • the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 in the magnetic circuit component 2900 can increase the total magnetic flux in the magnetic gap, thereby increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • the originally scattered magnetic flux lines will converge to the position of the magnetic gap, further increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3000 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3000 may include a first magnetic element 2902, a first magnetically permeable element 2904, a first full magnetic field changing element 2906, a second magnetic element 2908, and a third magnetic element 2910.
  • the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 and / or the second ring element 2922 may include a ring magnetic element or a ring magnetically permeable element.
  • the ring-shaped magnetic element may include any one or several kinds of magnetic materials described in this application, and the ring-shaped magnetically permeable element may include any one or several types of magnetically conductive materials described in this application.
  • the sixth magnetic element 2918 may be connected to the fifth magnetic element 2916 and the second ring element 2922
  • the seventh magnetic element 2920 may be connected to the third magnetic element 2910 and the second ring element 2922.
  • the first magnetic element 2902, the fifth magnetic element 2916, the second magnetic element 2908, the third magnetic element 2910, the fourth magnetic element 2912, the sixth magnetic element 2918, and / or the seventh magnetic element 2920 and The first magnetically permeable element 2904, the first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and the second annular element 2922 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • an included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is changed from the sixth The outer ring of the magnetic element 2918 points to the inner ring (as shown in the direction f in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2902, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is deflected 270 degrees clockwise). In some embodiments, in the same vertical direction, the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 may be the same.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is changed from the seventh The lower surface of the magnetic element 2920 points to the upper surface (as shown by the direction e in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2902, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is deflected 360 degrees in a clockwise direction).
  • the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 and the magnetization direction of the fourth magnetic element 2912 may be the same.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 2900 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the sixth magnetic element 2918, the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • an included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 3000 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the seventh magnetic element 2920, the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 may be a ring-shaped magnetic element.
  • the magnetization direction of the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 may be the same as that of the second magnetic element 2908 or the fourth magnetic element 2912.
  • the magnetization direction of the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 may be directed from the outer ring of the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 to the inner ring.
  • the second ring element 2922 may be a ring magnetic element.
  • the magnetization direction of the second ring element 2922 may be the same as that of the sixth magnetic element 2918 or the seventh magnetic element 2920.
  • the magnetization direction of the second ring element 2922 may be directed from the outer ring of the second ring element 2922 to the inner ring.
  • multiple magnetic elements can increase the total magnetic flux, and the interaction of different magnetic elements can suppress the leakage of magnetic induction lines, increase the magnetic induction strength at the magnetic gap, and increase the sensitivity of the speaker assembly.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 may include a first magnetic element 3102, a first magnetically permeable element 3104, a second magnetically permeable element 3106, and a second magnetic element 3108.
  • the first magnetic element 3102 and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may include any one or several magnets described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 3102 may include a first magnet
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may include a second magnet
  • the first magnet and the second magnet may be the same or different.
  • the first magnetically permeable element 3104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 3106 may include any one or several magnetically permeable materials described in this application.
  • the processing method of the first magnetically permeable element 3104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 3106 may include any one or several processing methods described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may be provided as an axisymmetric structure.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may be a cylinder.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may be coaxial cylinders containing the same or different diameters.
  • the thickness of the first magnetic element 3102 may be greater than or equal to the thickness of the second magnetic element 3108.
  • the second magnetically permeable element 3106 may be a groove-type structure.
  • the groove structure may include a U-shaped cross section.
  • the groove-type second magnetically conductive element 3106 may include a bottom plate and a side wall.
  • the bottom plate and the side wall may be integrally formed.
  • the side wall may be formed by extending the bottom plate in a direction perpendicular to the bottom plate.
  • the bottom plate may be connected to the side wall by any one or several connection methods described in this application.
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may be set in a ring shape or a sheet shape. Regarding the shape of the second magnetic element 3108, reference may be made to the description elsewhere in the specification.
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may be coaxial with the first magnetic element 3102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 3104.
  • An upper surface of the first magnetic element 3102 may be connected to a lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 3104.
  • the lower surface of the first magnetic element 3102 can be connected to the bottom plate of the second magnetically conductive element 3106.
  • the lower surface of the second magnetic element 3108 is connected to the upper surface of the first magnetically conductive element 3104.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, the second magnetically permeable element 3106, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may include one of bonding, snapping, welding, riveting, bolting, etc. or Multiple combinations.
  • a magnetic gap is formed between the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104 and / or the second magnetic element 3108 and the side wall of the second magnetically permeable element 3106.
  • a voice coil may be provided in the magnetic gap.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, the second magnetically permeable element 3106, and the second magnetic element 3108 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 may generate a first full magnetic field, and the first magnetic element 3102 may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the first full magnetic field is a magnetic field generated by all components in the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 (for example, the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, the second magnetically permeable element 3106, and the second magnetic element 3108) Together.
  • the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap (also referred to as magnetic induction intensity or magnetic flux density) is greater than the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field in the magnetic gap.
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may generate a third magnetic field, and the third magnetic field may increase the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field at the magnetic gap.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 and the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 3102 is between 90 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 and the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 3102 is between 150 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 is opposite to that of the first magnetic element 3102 (as shown in the figure, the a direction and the b direction).
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 adds a second magnetic element 3108.
  • the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 is opposite to the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 3102.
  • the magnetic leakage of the first magnetic element 3102 in the magnetization direction can be suppressed, so that the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 3102 can be more compressed to magnetic In the gap, the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap is thus increased.
  • the above description of the speaker component is only a specific example and should not be considered as the only feasible implementation solution.
  • the magnetic element in the magnetic circuit assembly is not limited to the above-mentioned first magnetic element, second magnetic element, third magnetic element, fourth magnetic element, fifth magnetic element, sixth magnetic element, seventh magnetic element, and may also Increase or decrease the number of magnetic components. Such deformations are all within the protection scope of this application.
  • the speaker assembly described above may also transmit sound to the user by means of air conduction.
  • the speaker assembly may include one or more sound sources.
  • the sound source may be located at a specific position of the user's head, for example, the top of the head, forehead, cheeks, horns, auricle, back of auricle, etc., without blocking or covering the ear canal.
  • FIG. 31 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting sound through air conduction.
  • the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 can generate sound waves with opposite phases ("+" and "-" in the figure indicate opposite phases).
  • the sound source referred to here refers to a sound output hole on the speaker component for outputting sound.
  • the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 may be two sound emitting holes respectively located at specific positions on the glasses (for example, the earphone housing 220 in FIG. 19 or the glasses legs 15 in FIG. 1).
  • the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 may be generated by the same vibration device 3301.
  • the vibration device 3301 includes a diaphragm (not shown in the figure). When the diaphragm is driven by an electric signal to vibrate, the front of the diaphragm drives air to vibrate, and a sound source 3310 is formed at the sound outlet through the sound guide channel 3312. A sound source 3320 is formed at the hole.
  • the sound conducting channel refers to a sound propagation path from the diaphragm to the corresponding sound emitting hole.
  • the sound guiding channel is a path surrounded by a specific structure on the speaker assembly (for example, the earphone housing 220 in FIG. 19 or the temple 15 in FIG. 1). It should be known that, in some alternative embodiments, the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 may also be generated by different vibration devices through different diaphragm vibrations.
  • the sound transmitted to the user's ear may be referred to as near-field sound
  • the leaked sound transmitted to the environment may be referred to as far-field sound.
  • the near-field / far-field sounds of different frequencies generated by the speaker assembly are related to the distance between the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320.
  • the near-field sound generated by the speaker component will increase as the distance between the two sound sources increases, and the far-field sound (leakage) generated will increase as the frequency increases.
  • the distance between the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 can be designed separately, so that the low-frequency near-field sound (for example, a sound with a frequency less than 800 Hz) generated by the speaker component is as large as possible, and the high-frequency far-field sound (for example, , Sounds with a frequency greater than 2000Hz) as small as possible.
  • the speaker assembly may include two or more sets of dual sound sources, and each set of dual sound sources includes two sound sources similar to sound source 3310 and sound source 3320, and generates sounds of a specific frequency respectively. .
  • the first group of dual sound sources may be used to generate low-frequency sounds
  • the second group of dual sound sources may be used to generate high-frequency sounds.
  • the distance between two sound sources in the first set of dual sound sources can be set to a larger value.
  • the low-frequency signal has a longer wavelength, a larger distance between the two sound sources will not cause an excessive phase difference in the far field, and therefore will not form too much sound leakage in the far field.
  • the distance between the two sound sources in the second set of dual sound sources can be set to a smaller value. Because the high-frequency signal has a shorter wavelength, a smaller distance between the two sound sources can prevent a large phase difference from being formed in the far field, and thus can prevent a large sound leakage.
  • the distance between the second group of dual sound sources is smaller than the distance between the first group of dual sound sources.
  • the beneficial effects that the embodiments of the present application may bring include, but are not limited to: (1) the eyeglass frame and the eyeglasses can be connected through the hinge assembly, protecting the connecting wire in the glasses, and extending the life of the connecting wire; (2) through the flexible circuit Board, which can simplify the wiring in the speaker; (3) The sensitivity of the speaker device can be improved by adding a magnetic element, a magnetically permeable element, and a conductive element to the magnetic circuit assembly. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the foregoing, or any other beneficial effects that may be obtained.
  • aspects of this application can be illustrated and described through several patentable categories or situations, including any new and useful process, machine, product or substance combination, or their Any new and useful improvements. Accordingly, various aspects of the present application can be executed entirely by hardware, can be executed entirely by software (including firmware, resident software, microcode, etc.), and can also be executed by a combination of hardware and software.
  • the above hardware or software can be referred to as a "module,” “unit,” “component,” or “system.”
  • aspects of the present application may manifest as a computer product located in one or more computer-readable media, the product including a computer-readable program code.
  • numbers describing components and the number of attributes are used. It should be understood that, for such numbers used in the description of the embodiments, the modifiers "about”, “approximately” or “substantially” are used in some examples To modify. Unless stated otherwise, “about”, “approximately” or “substantially” indicates that the number allows for a variation of ⁇ 20%. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the numerical data used in the specification and claims are approximate values, and the approximate values may be changed according to the characteristics required by individual embodiments. In some embodiments, the numerical data should take into account the specified significant digits and adopt the method of general digits retention. Although the numerical ranges and data used to confirm the breadth of the range in some embodiments of this application are approximate values, in specific embodiments, the setting of such values is as accurate as possible within the feasible range.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Otolaryngology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Headphones And Earphones (AREA)
  • Eyeglasses (AREA)
  • Details Of Audible-Bandwidth Transducers (AREA)

Abstract

一种眼镜，包括：眼镜框(11)；眼镜腿(15)，眼镜腿(15)中容纳控制电路(162)或电池(161)；转轴组件(19)，转轴组件(19)用于连接眼镜框(11)和眼镜腿(15)，以使得眼镜框(11)和眼镜腿(15)能够绕转轴组件(19)进行相对转动，转轴组件(19)沿轴向设置有转轴走线通道(191)；连接线(17)，连接线(17)穿设于转轴走线通道(191)内并分别延伸至眼镜框(11)及眼镜腿(15)；以及扬声组件(300)，扬声组件(300)包括耳机芯(102)和用于容纳耳机芯(102)的机芯壳体(41)，扬声组件(300)与眼镜腿(15)连接，机芯壳体(41)包括面向人体一侧的外壳面板(222)和与外壳面板(222)相对的外壳背面(224)；控制电路(162)或电池(161)通过连接线(17)驱动耳机芯(102)振动以产生声音，耳机芯(102)的振动导致外壳面板(222)和外壳背面(224)振动，外壳面板(222)的振动具有第一相位，外壳背面(224)的振动具有第二相位，其中，外壳面板(222)的振动和外壳背面(224)的振动频率在2000Hz到3000Hz时，第一相位和第二相位的差值的绝对值小于60度。该眼镜通过软性电路板(44，106)简化了扬声器(100)内的走线方式，还通过转轴组件(19)连接眼镜框(11)和眼镜腿(15)，保护了眼镜中的连接线(17)，延长了连接线(17)的寿命。

Description

一种眼镜
优先权信息
本申请要求于2018年8月24日提交的中国申请号为201810975515.1，2019年1月5日提交的中国申请号为201910009904.3，2019年1月5日提交的中国申请号为201920031804.6的优先权，其全部内容通过引用的方式并入本文。
技术领域
本申请涉及眼镜领域，特别涉及一种带有扬声器的眼镜。
背景技术
随着扬声器技术的发展，如耳机、MP3等电子产品得到了非常广泛的应用。扬声器可以具有不同的产品形态。例如，扬声器可以集成在眼镜(太阳眼镜、游泳眼镜等)上，也可以通过特殊结构(例如，耳挂)固定在用户耳朵内或耳朵附近。随着产品的功能更加多样化，扬声器的内部模块和走线越来越多，布线也越来越复杂。复杂的布线大大占用产品的内部空间，而且不合理的导线分布会使得导线之间相互影响，从而带来异响影响扬声器的发声质量。因此，有必要提供一种更加高效的布线技术，简化扬声器的走线方式，提高扬声器的音质。
发明内容
本说明书实施例提供一种眼镜，所述眼镜包括：眼镜框；眼镜腿，所述眼镜腿中容纳控制电路或电池；转轴组件，所述转轴组件用于连接所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿，以使得所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿能够绕所述转轴组件进行相对转动，所述转轴组件沿轴向设置有转轴走线通道；连接线，所述连接线穿设于所述转轴走线通道内并分别延伸至所述眼镜框及所述眼镜腿；以及扬声组件，所述扬声组件包括耳机芯和用于容纳所述耳机芯的机芯壳体，所述扬声组件与所述眼镜腿连接，所述机芯壳体包括面向人体一侧的外壳面板和与所述外壳面板相对的外壳背面；所述控制电路或电池通过所述的连接线驱动所述耳机芯振动以产生声音，所述耳机芯的振动导致所述外壳面板和所述外壳背面振动，所述外壳面板的振动具有第一相位，所述外壳背面的振动具有第二相位，其中，所述外壳面板的振动和所述外壳背面的振动频率在2000Hz到3000Hz时，所述第一相位和所述第二相位的差值的绝对值小于60度。
附图说明
本申请将以示例性实施例的方式进一步说明，这些示例性实施例将通过附图进行详细描述。这些实施例并非限制性的，在这些实施例中，相同的编号表示相同的结构，其中：
图1为根据本申请一些实施例提供的一种扬声器的结构模块图；
图2为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种软性电路板的结构示意图；
图3为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的局部结构爆炸图；
图4为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的局部结构截面图；
图5为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的局部截面图；
图6为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器图5中F部分的局部放大图；
图7为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的爆炸图；
图8为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中鼻托套的结构示意图；
图9为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中眼镜框与眼镜片的局部截面示意图；
图10为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器图9中A部分的放大图；
图11为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中连接线的局部结构示意图；
图12为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器图7中B部分的局部结构示意图；
图13为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中眼镜的局部结构的截面放大示意图；
图14为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中转轴组件与连接线结构示意图；
图15为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中第一转轴的结构示意图；
图16所示为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的局部爆炸图；
图17所示为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中眼镜框与眼镜片的结构示意图；
图18所示为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器中眼镜腿的局部结构示意图。
图19是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的骨传导扬声组件的纵截面示意图；
图20是根据本申请一些实施例提供的一个骨传导扬声组件的结构示意图；
图21是根据本申请一些实施例提供的另一个骨传导扬声组件的结构示意图；
图22是根据本申请一些实施例提供的又一个骨传导扬声组件的结构示意图；
图23是根据本申请一些实施例提供的骨传导扬声组件的壳体结构示意图；
图24是根据本申请一些实施例提供的扬声组件的结构示意图；
图25是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2100的纵截面示意图；
图26是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的磁路组件2600的纵截面示意图；
图27是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2700的纵截面示意图；
图28是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2900的纵截面示意图；
图29是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3000的纵截面示意图；
图30是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3100的纵截面示意图；
图31是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的通过气传导传递声音的示意图。
具体实施方式
为了更清楚地说明本申请的实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单的介绍。显而易见地，下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请的一些示例或实施例，对于本领域的普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动的前提下，还可以根据这些附图将本申请应用于其他类似 情景。应当理解，给出这些示例性实施例仅仅是为了使相关领域的技术人员能够更好地理解进而实现本发明，而并非以任何方式限制本发明的范围。除非从语言环境中显而易见或另做说明，图中相同标号代表相同结构或操作。
如本申请和权利要求书中所示，除非上下文明确提示例外情形，“一”、“一个”、“一种”和/或“该”等词并非特指单数，也可包括复数。一般说来，术语“包括”与“包含”仅提示包括已明确标识的步骤和元素，而这些步骤和元素不构成一个排它性的罗列，方法或者设备也可能包含其他的步骤或元素。术语“基于”是“至少部分地基于”。术语“一个实施例”表示“至少一个实施例”；术语“另一实施例”表示“至少一个另外的实施例”。其他术语的相关定义将在下文描述中给出。以下，不失一般性，在描述本发明中声音传导相关技术时，将采用“播放器”、“扬声组件”、“扬声装置”或“扬声组件”的描述。该描述仅仅为声音传导应用的一种形式，对于该领域的普通技术人员来说，“播放器”、“播放装置”、“扬声组件”、“扬声装置”或“助听器”也可用其他同类词语代替。事实上，本发明中的各种实现方式可以很方便地应用到其它非扬声组件类的听力设备上。例如，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解扬声组件的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施扬声组件的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，特别地，扬声组件中加入环境声音拾取和处理功能，使该扬声组件实现助听器的功能。例如，在使用骨传导扬声组件的情况下，加入可以拾取使用者/佩戴者周围环境的声音的麦克风等传声器，在一定的算法下，将声音处理后(或者产生的电信号)传送至骨传导扬声组件部分。即，骨传导扬声组件可以经过一定的修改，加入拾取环境声音的功能，并经过一定的信号处理后通过骨传导扬声组件部分将声音传递给使用者/佩戴者，从而实现骨传导助听器的功能。作为举例，这里所说的算法可以包括噪声消除、自动增益控制、声反馈抑制、宽动态范围压缩、主动环境识别、主动抗噪、定向处理、耳鸣处理、多通道宽动态范围压缩、主动啸叫抑制、音量控制等一种或多种的组合。
图1所示为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的结构模块图。
扬声器100可以至少包括耳机芯102、辅助功能模块104和软性电路板106。
在一些实施例中，耳机芯102可以接收音频电信号并将音频信号转换为声音信号。软性电路板106为不同模块/组件之间提供电连接。例如，软性电路板106可以提供耳机芯102与外部控制电路和辅助功能模块104之间的电连接。
在一些实施例中，耳机芯102可以至少包括磁路组件、振动组件以及容纳磁路组件和振动组件的支架。磁路组件用于提供磁场，振动组件用于将输入至振动组件的电信号转化为机械振动信号，并由此产生声音。在一些实施例中，振动组件可以至少包括线圈和内部引线。在一些实施例中，耳机芯102还包括外部导线，外部导线能够将音频电流传输至振动组件中的线圈。外部导线可以一端连接耳机芯的内部引线，一端连接扬声器的软性电路板。在一些实施例中，支架可以具有埋线槽，所述外部导线和/或所述内部导线可以部分设置于所述埋线槽内，具体详见本申请其他部分的描述。
在一些实施例中，辅助功能模块104用于接收辅助信号，执行辅助功能。辅助功能模块104可以为区别于耳机芯之外的用于接收辅助信号而执行辅助功能的模块。在本申请中，将音频信号转 换为声音信号可以认为是扬声器100的主要功能，而不同于主要功能的其他功能可以认为是扬声器100的辅助功能。例如，扬声器100的辅助功能可以包括通过麦克风接收用户和/或环境声音，通过按键控制所述声音信号的播放过程等。其对应的辅助功能模块可以是麦克风、按键开关等，具体可根据实际需求设置。所述辅助信号可以是与辅助功能相关的电信号、光信号、声信号和振动信号中的一种或多种的组合。
扬声器100还包括用于容纳所述耳机芯102、所述辅助功能模块104和所述软性电路板106的机芯壳体108。当扬声器100是一种骨传导耳机时，机芯壳体108的内壁可以和耳机芯中的振动组件直接或者间接相连接，当用户佩戴所述骨传导耳机时，机芯壳体108的外壁与用户接触并将振动组件的机械振动经由骨骼传递到听觉神经，使人体听到声音。在一些实施例中，扬声器可以包括耳机芯102、辅助功能模块104、软性电路板106和机芯壳体108。
在一些实施例中，所述软性电路板106可以是柔性电路板(Flexible Printed Circuit，FPC)，并容置于机芯壳体108的内部空间。所述软性电路板106可以具有高可挠性，能够适应机芯壳体108内部空间。具体的，在一些实施例中，软性电路板106可以包括第一板体和第二板体。所述软性电路板106可以在第一板体和第二版体处进行弯折，从而适应其在机芯壳体108中的位置等。更具体的内容请参见本申请中其他部分的描述。
在一些实施例中，扬声器100通过骨传导方式传递声音。机芯壳体108外表面可以具有贴合面。所述贴合面为当用户佩戴扬声器100时，扬声器100的与人体相接触的外表面。扬声器100能够将贴合面压紧在预设区域(耳屏前端、头骨位置或耳廓背面)，从而有效地将振动信号经由骨骼传递给用户的听觉神经，提高扬声器100的音质。在一些实施例中，贴合面可以与耳廓背面贴合。机械振动信号由耳机芯传导至机芯壳体，并通过机芯壳体的贴合面传导至耳廓背面，进而由耳廓背面附近的骨骼将振动信号传至听神经。在这种情况下，耳廓背面附近骨骼更接近听神经，具有更好的传导效果，可以提高扬声器100向听神经传递声音的效率。
在一些实施例中，扬声器100还包括固定机构110。固定机构110与所述机芯壳体108外部连接，用于支撑并保持所述机芯壳体108的位置。在一些实施例中，所述固定机构110内可以设置有电池组件和控制电路。所述电池组件可以为扬声器100中的任意电子组件提供电能。所述控制电路可以控制扬声器100中的任意功能组件，所述功能组件包括但不限于耳机芯、辅助功能模块等。所述控制电路可以通过软性电路板与电池及其他功能组件连接，也可以通过导线与电池及其他功能组件连接。
在一些实施例中，固定机构110可以为眼镜架、帽子、头饰或其他头戴用品中的一种或几种的组合。例如，固定机构110可以是眼镜架。眼镜架内部形成空腔，可以容纳电池组件、软性电路板和控制电路。在这种情况下，耳机芯102可以位于眼镜腿的尾端，在用户佩戴眼镜时位于耳边并提供声音信号。
图2所示为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种位于机芯壳体内部的软性电路板的结构示意图。
在一些实施例中，软性电路板上可以设置多个焊盘，并通过若干不同的软性引线将不同的信号导线(例如，音频信号导线、辅助信号导线)与不同的焊盘分别电连接，以避免音频信号导线和辅助信号导线都需要与耳机芯或辅助功能模块连接，产生的内部导线众多并且繁杂的问题。如图2和图3所示，软性电路板44至少包括多个第一焊盘45和多个第二焊盘(未在图中示出)。在一些实施例中，图2中的软性电路板44与图1中软性电路板106相对应。所述第一焊盘45中的至少一个第一焊盘45与辅助功能模块电连接，所述至少一个第一焊盘45通过所述软性电路板44上的第一软性引线47与至少一个所述第二焊盘电连接，所述至少一个第二焊盘通过外部导线(未在图中示出)与所述耳机芯(未在图中示出)电连接。所述第一焊盘45中的至少另一个第一焊盘45与辅助信号导线电连接，所述至少另一个第一焊盘45与所述辅助功能模块通过所述软性电路板44上的第二软性引线49电连接。在本实施例中，至少一个第一焊盘45与辅助功能模块电连接，至少一个第二焊盘通过外部导线和耳机芯电连接，再通过第一软性引线47将至少一个第一焊盘45中的一个与至少一个第二焊盘中的一个进行电连接，使得外部音频信号导线和辅助信号导线同时通过软性电路板与耳机芯和多个辅助功能模块电连接，简化了走线的排布。
在一些实施例中，所述音频信号导线可以是与耳机芯电连接并向耳机芯传输音频信号的导线。所述辅助信号导线可以是与辅助功能模块电连接并与辅助功能模块进行信号传输的的导线。
在一些实施例中，参见图2，具体地，所述软性电路板44上设置有多个焊盘45以及两个焊盘(未在图中标出)，该两个焊盘与多个焊盘45位于软性电路板44的同一侧并间隔设置。且两个焊盘通过软性电路板44上的软性引线47连接至多个焊盘45中对应的两个焊盘45上。进一步地，该机芯壳体41内还容纳有两条外部导线，每条外部导线的一端焊接在对应的焊盘上，另一端连接至耳机芯，从而使得耳机芯通过外部导线与焊盘连接。辅助功能模块可贴装于该软性电路板44上，并通过该软性电路板44上的软性引线49连接至多个焊盘45中的其它焊盘上。
在一些实施例中，扬声器100的固定机构110中设置有导线，导线至少包括音频信号导线和辅助信号导线。在一些实施例中，固定机构110中的导线可以是多条，包括至少两条音频信号导线和至少两条辅助信号导线。例如，固定机构110可以是眼镜架，眼镜架与机芯壳体41连接，导线可以是设置在眼镜架中的导线，多个眼镜架导线的一端焊接至机芯壳体10内设置的软性电路板44上，或者控制电路板上，另一端则进入机芯壳体41内部，并与软性电路板44上的焊盘45焊接。
其中，多个眼镜架导线中的两条音频信号导线的位于机芯壳体41内的一端焊接至两条软性引线47所焊接的两个焊盘45，另一端可直接或间接连接在控制电路板上，该两个焊盘45进一步通过软性引线49与两个焊盘46的焊接，以及两条外部导线与焊盘的焊接而连接耳机芯，从而向耳机芯传递音频信号。
至少两条辅助信号导线的位于机芯壳体41内的一端焊接至软性引线49所焊接的焊盘45上，另一端则可直接或间接连接在控制电路板上，从而向控制电路(未在图中示出)传递由辅助功能模块接收并转化得到的辅助信号。
上述方式中，在机芯壳体41内设置软性电路板44，并在软性电路板44上进一步设置相应 的焊盘，从而将导线(未在图中示出)-进入机芯壳体41内后焊接在相应的焊盘上，并进一步通过焊盘上的软性引线47、软性引线49进一步再连接相应的辅助功能模块，从而避免将多个导线-均直接连接在的辅助功能模块上而使得机芯壳体41内的走线繁杂的情况，从而能够优化走线的排布，并节约机芯壳体41空间的占用；而且将多个眼镜架导线均直接连接在的辅助功能模块上时，眼镜架导线的中间部位悬挂于机芯壳体41内而容易造成的振动，从而带来异响以影响耳机芯的发声质量，而按照上述方式中将眼镜架导线焊接在软性电路板44上而进一步连接相应的辅助功能模块则能够减少导线悬挂而影响耳机芯发生质量的情况，从而在一定程度上能够提高耳机芯的发声质量。
在一些实施例中，可以进一步在软性电路板(或称为软性电路板44)上进行分区，将软性电路板划分成至少两个区域。每一分区上可以设置有一个辅助功能模块，以使得软性电路板上可以设置有至少两个辅助功能模块，通过软性电路板实现音频信号导线和辅助信号导线与至少两个辅助功能模块之间的走线。在一些实施例中，所述软性电路板可以至少包括主体电路板和第一分支电路板。所述第一分支电路板和所述主体电路板相连，并远离所述主体电路板沿所述主体电路板的一端延伸。辅助功能模块可以至少包括第一辅助功能模块和第二辅助功能模块。第一辅助功能模块可以设置于所述主体电路板上，第二辅助功能模块可以设置于所述第一分支电路板上。多个第一焊盘可以设置于所述主体电路板上，第二焊盘可以设置于所述第一分支电路板上。在一些实施例中，所述第一辅助功能模块可以为按键开关，所述按键开关可以设置于所述主体电路板上，并对应于按键开关设置所述第一焊盘。所述第二辅助功能模块可以为麦克风，所述麦克风设置于第一分支电路板上，并在第一分支电路板上设置有对应于麦克风的第二焊盘。通过第二软性引线连接所述主体电路板上对应于按键开关的第一焊盘与第一分支电路板上对应于麦克风的第二焊盘，可以将按键开关与麦克风进行电连接，使按键开关可以对麦克风进行控制或操作。
在一些实施例中，所述软性电路板还可以包括第二分支电路板，所述第二分支电路板和所述主体电路板相连，并远离所述主体电路板沿所述主体电路板的另一端延伸，并与所述第一分支电路板间隔设置。所述辅助功能模块还可以包括第三辅助功能模块，所述第三辅助功能模块设置在所述第二分支电路板上。所述多个第一焊盘设置于所述主体电路板上，至少一个所述第二焊盘设置于所述第一分支电路板上，其他所述第二焊盘设置与所述第二分支电路上。在一些实施例中，所述第三辅助功能模块可以是第二麦克风。第二分支电路板与主体电路板垂直延伸，第二麦克风贴装于第二分支电路板远离主体电路板的端部，多个焊盘则设置于主体电路板远离和第二分支电路板的端部。
具体地，如图2和图3所示，第二辅助功能模块可以是第一麦克风432a，第三辅助功能模块可以是第二麦克风432b。其中，第一麦克风432a和第二麦克风432b都可以是MEMS(微型机电系统)麦克风432，工作电流小，性能较为稳定，且产生的语音质量高。两个麦克风432根据实际需求可设置在软性电路板44的不同位置上。
其中，软性电路板44包括主体电路板441(或称为主体电路板)以及与主体电路板441连接的分支电路板442(或称为第一分支电路板)和分支电路板443(或称为第二分支电路板)，分支电路板442与主体电路板441同向延伸，第一麦克风432a贴装于分支电路板442远离主体电路板 441的端部，分支电路板443与主体电路板441垂直延伸，第二麦克风432b贴装于分支电路板443远离主体电路板441的端部，多个焊盘45则设置于主体电路板441远离分支电路板442和分支电路板443的端部。
在一实施方式中，机芯壳体41包括环绕设置的周侧壁411以及与周侧壁411的一端面连接的底端壁412，进而形成具有一开口端的容置空间。其中，耳机芯经开口端放置于容置空间内，第一麦克风432a固定于底端壁412上，第二麦克风432b固定于周侧壁411上。
本实施方式中，可以适当对分支电路板442和/或分支电路板443进行弯折，以适应麦克风432对应的入声孔在机芯壳体41上的位置的设置。具体地，软性电路板44可以主体电路板441平行于底端壁412的方式设置于机芯壳体41内，从而能够使得第一麦克风432a对应于底端壁412，而无需对主体电路板441进行弯折。而第二麦克风432b由于固定于机芯壳体41的周侧壁411上，因此需要对第二主体电路板441进行弯折设置，具体可将分支电路板443在远离主体电路板441的端部弯折设置，以使得分支电路板443的板面垂直于主体电路板441和分支电路板442的板面，并进而使得第二麦克风432b朝向背离主体电路板441和分支电路板442的方向而固定于机芯壳体41的周侧壁411上。
在一实施方式中，焊盘45、焊盘、第一麦克风432a和第二麦克风432b均可设置于软性电路板44的同一侧，焊盘与第二麦克风432b相邻设置。
其中，焊盘可具体设置于分支电路板443远离主体电路板441的端部，并与第二麦克风432b朝向相同并间隔设置，从而随分支电路板443的弯折而垂直于焊盘45的朝向。需要指出的是，分支电路板443在弯折后其板面也可以不垂直于主体电路板441的板面，具体可根据周侧壁411与底端壁412之间的设置方式而定。
进一步地，软性电路板44的另一侧设置有用于支撑焊盘45的刚性支撑板4a、麦克风刚性支撑板4b，该麦克风刚性支撑板4b包括用于支撑第一麦克风432a的刚性支撑板4b1以及用于共同支撑焊盘46与第二麦克风432b的刚性支撑板4b2。
其中，刚性支撑板4a、刚性支撑板4b1和刚性支撑板4b2主要用于对相应的焊盘和麦克风432起支撑作用，从而需具有一定的强度。三者的材质可以相同或者不同，具体可以为聚酰亚胺(PolyimideFilm，PI)，或者其它能够起到强度支撑作用的材质，如聚碳酸酯、聚氯乙烯等。另外，三个刚性支撑板的厚度可以根据刚性支撑板本身所具有的强度以及焊盘45、焊盘以及第一麦克风432a、第二麦克风432b所实际需求的强度进行设定，此处不做具体限定。
其中，刚性支撑板4a、刚性支撑板4b1和刚性支撑板4b2可以为一个刚性支撑板整体的三个不同区域，或者也可以是三个彼此间隔设置的独立的整体，此处不做具体限定。
在一实施方式中，第一麦克风432a和第二麦克风432b分别对应于两个麦克风组件(未在图中示出)。在一实施方式中，两个麦克风组件的结构相同，机芯壳体41上设置有入声孔413，进一步地，该骨传导扬声装置在机芯壳体41处还设置有一体成型于机芯壳体41的内表面的环形挡壁414，并设置于入声孔413的外围，进而定义一与入声孔413连通的容置空间(未在图中示出)。
在一实施方式中，软性电路板44可设置于刚性支撑板(如，刚性支撑板4a、刚性支撑板4b1和刚性支撑板4b2)和麦克风432之间，并在对应于麦克风刚性支撑板4b的入声孔4b3的位置设置有入声孔444。
进一步地，软性电路板44进一步向远离麦克风432的方向延伸，以与其它功能元件或导线连接而实现相应的功能。对应地，麦克风刚性支撑板4b上也随着软性电路板向远离麦克风432的方向延伸出一段距离。
对应地，环形挡壁414上设置有与软性电路板44的形状匹配的缺口，以允许该软性电路板44从容置空间延伸而出。另外，可在该缺口处进一步填充密封胶，以进一步提高密封性。
在一些实施例中，如图4所示，软性电路板44可包括主体电路板445以及分支电路板446，其中，该分支电路板446可沿垂直于主体电路板445的延伸方向而延伸。其中多个焊盘45设置于主体电路板445远离分支电路板446的端部，按键开关贴装于主体电路板445上，焊盘46设置于分支电路板446远离主体电路板445的端部。第一辅助功能模块可以是按键开关431，第二辅助功能模块可以是麦克风432。
本实施方式中，软性电路板44的板面与底端壁412平行间隔设置，以使得按键开关可朝向机芯壳体41的底端壁412设置。
如前所述，耳机芯(或称为耳机芯102)可以包括磁路组件、振动组件、外部导线、支架。其中，振动组件包括线圈和内部引线，外部导线能够将音频电流传输至振动组件中的线圈。外部导线可以一端连接耳机芯的内部引线，一端连接扬声器的软性电路板。支架可以具有埋线槽，至少部分所述外部导线和/或所述内部导线可以设置于所述埋线槽内。在一些实施例中，内部引线和外部引线彼此焊接连接，焊接位置可以位于所述埋线槽内。
具体的，参见图5和图6，耳机芯包括支架421、线圈422以及外部导线48。支架421用于对整个耳机芯结构起支撑以及保护作用。本实施方式中，支架421上设置有埋线槽4211，可用于容纳耳机芯的线路。
线圈422可设置于支架421上，并具有至少一个内部引线423，该内部引线423的一端与线圈422中的主线路连接，以将主线路引出，并通过该内部引线423向线圈422传输音频电流。
外部导线48一端与内部引线423进行连接，进一步地，该外部导线48另一端可连接至控制电路(未在图中标出)，以通过控制电路而藉由内部引线423向线圈422传输音频电流。
具体地，在装配阶段，需要将外部导线48和内部引线423通过焊接等方式连接在一起，由于结构等因素的限制，在焊接完成后，不能使得线的长度与通道的长度恰好一致，通常会有多余长度的线。而多余长度的线若不能够得到合理的放置，则会随线圈422的振动而振动，从而发出异响，影响耳机芯所发出的声音质量。
进一步地，可将外部导线48和内部引线423中的至少一个卷绕设置于埋线槽4211内，在一个应用场景中，可将内部引线423和外部导线48之间的焊接位置设置于埋线槽4211内，从而将外部导线48和内部引线423位于焊接位置附近的部分卷绕于埋线槽4211内。另外，为了保持稳定， 可进一步在埋线槽4211内填充密封胶，从而对埋线槽4211中的走线起固定作用。
上述方式中，在支架421上设置埋线槽4211，从而将外部导线48和内部引线423中的至少一个卷绕设置于埋线槽4211内，以收纳多余长度的走线，从而减弱其在通道当中所产生的振动，进而减少由于振动产生异响而对耳机芯所发出的声音质量的影响。
在一实施方式中，支架421包括环形主体4212、支撑凸缘4213以及外挡壁4214。其中，环形主体4212、支撑凸缘4213以及外挡壁4214可通过一体成型得到。
其中，环形主体4212设置于整个支架421的内侧，用于支撑线圈422。具体地，环形主体4212的沿垂直于环形径向的方向上的横截面与线圈422一致，线圈422设置于该环形主体4212的朝向机芯壳体内部一端，且该环形主体4212的内侧壁和外侧壁可分别与线圈422的内侧壁与外侧壁平齐，从而使得线圈422的内侧壁与环形主体4212的内侧壁共面设置，以及线圈422的外侧壁与环形主体4212的外侧壁共面设置。
进一步地，支撑凸缘4213凸出设置于环形主体4212的外侧壁上，并向环形主体4212的外侧延伸，具体可沿垂直于环形主体4212的外侧壁的方向向外侧延伸。其中，该支撑凸缘4213可设置于环形主体4212的两端部之间的位置。本实施方式中，该支撑凸缘4213可以环绕环形主体4212的外侧壁凸出形成一环状的支撑凸缘4213。在其它实施方式中，也可以根据需求而仅在环形主体4212的外侧壁的部分位置凸出形成。
外挡壁4214与支撑凸缘4213连接并沿环形主体4212的侧向与环形主体4212间隔设置。其中，外挡壁4214可间隔套设于环形主体4212和/或线圈422的外围，具体可根据实际需求而部分套设于环形主体4212和线圈422的外围，而部分套设于环形主体4212的外围。需要指出的是，本实施方式中，外挡壁4214靠近埋线槽4211的部分套设于部分环形主体4212的外围。具体地，外挡壁4214设置于支撑凸缘4213的远离机芯壳体的一侧。其中，环形主体4212的外侧壁与支撑凸缘4213远离机芯壳体的侧壁以及外挡壁4214的内侧壁共同定义该埋线槽4211。
在一实施方式中，环形主体4212和支撑凸缘4213上设置有走线通道424，内部引线423经走线通道424延伸至埋线槽4211内。
其中，该走线通道424包括位于环形主体4212上的子走线通道4241和位于支撑凸缘4213上的子走线通道4242。子走线通道4241贯穿环形主体4212的内侧壁和外侧壁设置，并在环形主体4212于靠近线圈422的一侧设置有连通该子走线通道4241一端的走线口42411，在靠近支撑凸缘4213的朝向机芯壳体内部一侧设置有连通该子走线通道4241另一端的走线口42412；子走线通道4242则沿朝向机芯壳体外部的方向贯通支撑凸缘4213，并在支撑凸缘4213朝向机芯壳体内部一侧设置有连通该子走线通道4242一端的走线口42421，在远离机芯壳体内部一侧设置有连通子走线通道4242另一端的走线口42422。其中，走线口42412与走线口42421通过支撑凸缘4213与环形主体4212之间的空间连通。
进一步地，内部引线423可进入走线口42411，并沿子走线通道4241延伸，并从走线口42412穿出而进入环形主体4212与支撑凸缘4213之间的区域，进一步由走线口42421进入子走线 通道4242，在由走线口42422穿出后延伸入埋线槽4211。
在一实施方式中，外挡壁4214的顶端设置有开槽42141，外部导线48可经开槽42141延伸至埋线槽4211内。
其中，外部导线48的一端设置于柔性电路板44上，该柔性电路板44具体设置于耳机芯的朝向机芯壳体内部一侧。
本实施方式中，支撑凸缘4213进一步延伸至外挡壁4214的远离环形主体4212的一侧，以形成一外边缘。进一步地，该外边缘环绕抵接于机芯壳体的内侧壁。具体地，支撑凸缘4213的外边缘设置有开槽42131，从而使得位于耳机芯的朝向机芯壳体内部一侧的外部导线48能够通过该经开槽42131延伸至而由支撑凸缘4213的朝向机芯壳体外部一侧，进而延伸至开槽42141，并由开槽42141而进入埋线槽4211。
进一步地，机芯壳体内侧壁上设置有一端位于软性电路板44一侧，另一端连通开槽42131的沿朝向机芯壳体外部的方向延伸的导引槽416，以使得在外部导线48通过该导引槽416而由软性线路板延伸至第二走线槽3331。
在一实施方式中，支架421进一步包括沿环形主体4212的周向间隔设置且连接环形主体4212、支撑凸缘4213和外挡壁4214的两个侧挡壁4215，进而在两个侧挡壁4215之间定义埋线槽4211。
具体地，两个侧挡壁4215相对设置于支撑凸缘4213上，沿支撑凸缘4213朝向机芯壳体外部一侧凸出。其中，两个侧挡壁4215的朝向环形主体4212的一侧与环形主体4212的外侧壁连接，远离环形主体4212的一侧终止于外挡壁4214的外侧壁，并将走线口42422以及开槽42141限定于两个侧挡壁4215之间，从而使得由走线口42422穿出的内部引线423以及由开槽42141进入的外部导线48延伸入两个侧挡壁4215定义的埋线槽4211当中。
图7所示为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的结构示意图。
在一些实施例中，扬声器可以为眼镜。在一些实施例中，固定机构为可以是眼镜架。固定机构可以具有至少一个转轴组件，所述转轴组件用于连接眼镜框和眼镜腿，所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿能够围绕所述转轴组件转动，转轴组件具有沿轴线设置的转轴走线通道。固定机构中可以设置有连接线，连接线为电连接线，连接线穿设于所述转轴走线通道内，两端分别延伸至所述眼镜框内和所述眼镜腿内。在一些实施例中，两侧的眼镜腿内可以分别容纳有控制电路和电池组件，所述眼镜框内的连接线电连接所述控制电路和所述电池组件。连接线可以包括所述音频信号导线和所述辅助信号导线。连接线可以与机芯壳体(即机芯壳体108)内的软性电路板(即软性电路板106)电连接，通过软性电路板与耳机芯(即耳机芯102)和辅助功能模块(即辅助功能模块104)电连接。
在一些实施例中，本申请的眼镜可以是在人们日常生活、工作过程中所佩戴的用以矫正视力、保护眼睛的眼镜，或者是在上述眼镜的基础上进一步加设一定的电路结构、电子元件等，以进一步通过这些电路结构和电子元件等以实现特定功能的眼镜。具体地，本申请中的眼镜可以是智能眼镜、虚拟现实眼镜、全息眼镜、增强现实眼镜、带有其他功能结构的眼镜(如带有骨传导耳机或 者气传导耳机的眼镜等)。
在一些实施例中，如图7所示，所述眼镜架可以包括：眼镜框11、鼻托12、眼镜片13以及眼镜腿15。
其中，眼镜框11用于承载至少部分眼镜片13，鼻托12用于在用户佩戴时，将眼镜支撑于用户的鼻梁上。
鼻托12设置于眼镜框11的中部，并和眼镜框11一体成型。现有技术当中，眼镜框11与鼻托12通常分别成型，其中，眼镜框11的中部设置有与鼻托12连接的结构，在成型后，将鼻托12安装在眼镜框11的连接结构上。而本实施方式中则直接形成结构为一体的眼镜框11和鼻托12，具体地，可采用对应的模具，通过注塑等方式一体成型。本实施方式中的眼镜框11和鼻托12在形成之后无需再进一步进行安装，从而能够简化眼镜的制作工序。
另外，眼镜片13也采用一体设计，并由眼镜框11和鼻托12以卡接方式对眼镜片13进行固定。
进一步地，眼镜框11和鼻托12上分别设置有对眼镜片13进行卡接的结构，在对眼镜进行组装时，将一体设计的眼镜片13直接通过对应的卡接结构卡接在一体成型的眼镜框11和鼻托12上即可。
上述实施方式中，眼镜框11和鼻托12一体成型，且眼镜片13也采用一体设计，从而使得整个眼镜结构简单，且能够简化眼镜的制作工序。
请进一步参阅图7，图7是本申请眼镜一实施方式的爆炸图。本实施方式中，眼镜片13包括一顶侧边缘131以及与顶侧边缘131的两端连接且远离鼻托12设置的两个外侧边缘132，每个外侧边缘132分别凸出设置有第一扣位1321，眼镜框11设置有用于接收顶侧边缘131和至少部分外侧边缘132的第一安装槽111以及与第一安装槽111连通并用于接收第一扣位1321的第一扣位槽112。
其中，在眼镜处于佩戴状态时，顶侧边缘131位于眼镜片13的上侧，外侧边缘位于眼镜片13靠近用户耳朵的两侧，顶侧边缘131与两个外侧边缘132互相连接在一起。第一安装槽111设置于眼镜框11朝向眼镜片13的一侧，其尺寸与对应的眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131和两个外侧边缘132相匹配，以使得眼镜片13能够通过将顶侧边缘131和至少部分的外侧边缘132安装在第一安装槽111内进而安装在眼镜框11上。
进一步地，第一扣位1321由眼镜片13的至少部分外侧边缘131进一步向远离鼻托12的两侧延伸而形成，第一扣位槽112则由第一安装槽111中对应第一扣位1321的位置朝远离镜片13的方向凹陷而形成。其中，第一扣位槽112的形状尺寸与第一扣位1321匹配，使得眼镜片13能够进一步通过将第一扣位1321卡接在第一扣位槽112内而安装在眼镜框11上。
需要指出的是，至少部分外侧边缘132位于第一扣位1321远离顶侧边缘131的一侧，以使得第一扣位1321沿眼镜片13的边缘的两侧附近的眼镜片13均容置于第一安装槽111内，从而使得眼镜片13能够更加牢固得固定在眼镜框11上。
在一实施方式中，眼镜片13还包括与鼻托12抵接的内侧边缘133，鼻托12设置有用于接收内侧边缘133的第二安装槽121。
需要指出的是，眼镜片13包括左眼镜片和右眼镜片，眼镜片13的内侧边缘133设置于左眼镜片与右眼镜片的连接处及连接处的附近。相应地，第二安装槽121与第一安装槽111相对设置从而使得眼镜片13的相对两侧分别收容并固定于眼镜框11和鼻托12所构成的容置空间中。
在一实施方式中，内侧边缘133的两侧分别凸出设置有第二扣位1331，鼻托12上进一步设置有与第二安装槽121连接并用于接收第二扣位1331的第二扣位槽122。
其中，内侧边缘133包括互相连接的两部分，分别设置于左眼镜片朝向右眼镜片的一侧，以及右眼镜片朝向左眼镜片的一侧。鼻托12也分为两部分，在用户佩戴时，分别对应支撑在用户的左右两侧鼻梁上。相应地，本实施方式中，第二扣位槽122与第二扣位1331的数量也均为两个。第二扣位1331的形状尺寸与对应的第二扣位槽122相匹配，以将第二扣位1331分别安装在对应的第二扣位槽122中。
另外，眼镜片13在第二扣位1331的两侧附近均设置有内侧边缘133，从而使得第二扣位1331的两侧附近均能够安装在第二安装槽121中，以使得眼镜片13能够更加牢固得固定在鼻托12上。
通过上述方式，眼镜片13分别通过顶侧边缘131、外侧边缘132、内侧边缘133以及第一扣位1321和第二扣位1331将眼镜片13安装在眼镜框11和鼻托12上。
在一个应用场景中，眼镜片13上还设置有透气孔134，具体地，透气孔的数量可以为两个，分别设置在左右两侧的眼镜片13靠近顶侧边缘131的位置。透气孔134的设置，能够使得用户在佩戴眼镜时，眼镜片13的内外两侧能够实现空气流通，以减少由于用户运动等原因造成的局部过热而引起的眼镜片13起雾的现象。
具体地，请进一步一并参阅图7和图8，其中，图7为根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声器的爆炸图，图8为本申请眼镜一实施方式中鼻托套的结构示意图。在一实施方式中，鼻托12包括在佩戴状态下的第一安装槽111的靠近用户一侧或远离用户一侧与眼镜框11连接的连接部123，以及在连接部123远离眼镜框11一侧与连接部123呈倒Y字连接的两个支撑部124，支撑部124用于在佩戴时将眼镜支撑在用户的鼻梁上。
在一个应用场景中，连接部123与眼镜框11为一体连接，且在用户佩戴时，连接部123设置在第一安装槽111靠近用户的一侧。
每个支撑部124朝向用户鼻梁的一侧凸出设置有工字形卡勾1241，眼镜进一步包括以可拆卸方式套设在卡勾1241上的鼻托套14。
其中，鼻托套14可由软胶制成。具体地，工字形卡勾1241的数量可为两个，分别对应于用户的左右鼻梁，鼻托套14包括两个套本体141，以及连接两个套本体141的连接部142，其中，连接部142于用户的鼻梁上方连接在一起。套本体141对应设置有与卡勾1241匹配的工字形容置槽1411，且套本体141朝向用户鼻梁的一侧还可设置由多个凹槽组成的防滑部1412。本实施方式 中，鼻托套14可拆卸设置，从而方便鼻托套14的清洗以及更换。
进一步地，在一实施方式中，两个支撑部124背离卡勾1241的一侧凸出设置有条状凸肋1242，条状凸肋1242与两个支撑部124配合，以形成第二安装槽121和第二扣位槽122。
其中，条状凸肋1242沿两个支撑部124远离眼镜片13的边沿凸出设置，从而形成接收眼镜片13的内侧边缘133的第二安装槽121。在对应于眼镜片13的第二扣位1331的位置，条状凸肋1242进一步凹陷形成第二扣位槽122。
请一并参阅图7，在一实施方式中，眼镜架进一步还包括眼镜腿15、功能组件16以及连接线17。其中，眼镜腿15包括第一眼镜腿151和第二眼镜腿152，功能组件16包括第一功能组件161和第二功能组件162。
具体地，第一眼镜腿151和第二眼镜腿152分别与眼镜框11连接，第一功能组件161和第二功能组件162分别设置于第一眼镜腿151和第二眼镜腿152上，两条眼镜腿15上分别设置至少一腔体，以用来容置对应的功能组件16。
连接线17设置于第一安装槽111内，且介于第一安装槽111的底部与眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131之间，并进一步延伸至第一眼镜腿151和第二眼镜腿152，以电连接第一功能组件161与第二功能组件162。
本实施方式中，分别设置于两条眼镜腿15的功能组件16需要通过连接线17进行电性连接，以使眼镜实现特定功能。具体地，在一个应用场景中，第一功能组件161为电池组件，第二功能组件162为控制电路组件，控制电路组件通过连接线17与电池组件连接，以使得电池组件为控制电路组件提供电量，从使控制电路组件实现特定功能。
为了眼镜的美观、轻便等需求，连接线17沿眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131设置于第一安装槽111内，并容置于第一安装槽111与眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131所形成的空间内，从而使得连接线17既不会露出于眼镜的外表面，也不会额外占用空间。在一个应用场景中，连接线17还可在第一安装槽111内沿眼镜片13的外侧边缘132进一步延伸。
具体地，眼镜框11分别和第一眼镜腿151、第二眼镜腿152还可设置有连通的走线通道，从而使得连接线17能够通过对应的走线通道由眼镜框11的第一安装槽111进入第一眼镜腿151、第二眼镜腿152从而连接第一功能组件161与第二功能组件162。
本实施方式中，连接线17具有电性连接的功能，在其它实施方式中，连接线17还可以具有机械连接功能。
上述实施方式中，第一功能组件161和第二功能组件162分别设置在第一眼镜腿151和第二眼镜腿152上，电连接第一功能组件161与第二功能组件162的连接线17设置于眼镜框11上接收眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131的第一安装槽111内，以使连接线17介于第一安装槽111的底部与眼镜片的顶侧边缘131之间，并进一步延伸至第一眼镜腿151和第二眼镜腿152，从而连接线17不会外露，且不需要为连接线17的设置增设额外的空间，从而能够保持眼镜的美观以及轻便。
请进一步一并参阅图9、图10和图11，图9是本申请眼镜一实施方式中眼镜框与眼镜片 的局部截面示意图，图10是图9中A部分的放大图，图11是本申请眼镜一实施方式中连接线的局部结构示意图。本实施方式中，连接线17包括线本体171及包覆设置在线本体171外围的线保护套172。线保护套172的截面形状与第一安装槽111的截面形状匹配，以使得线保护套172以面接触方式保持在第一安装槽111中。
其中，线保护套172为软胶材质，使得连接线17能够进行折弯以匹配第一安装槽111的形状。容易理解地，线本体171较细，若直接安装在第一安装槽111内，与第一安装槽111的底部的接触面积较小，难以牢固得固定在其中。本实施方式中，进一步在线本体171外围设置包绕的线保护套172，一方面能够起到保护线本体171的作用，另一方面还能够通过调节线保护套172的表面积来增大连接线17与第一安装槽111的接触面积，以将线本体171可靠得固定在第一安装槽111内。
进一步地，第一安装槽111的截面形状为使得线保护套172能够以较大面积的面接触的方式保持在第一安装槽111中的形状。例如可以为U形、矩形或者波浪形等，此处不做具体限定。对应地，线保护套172朝向第一安装槽111的底部的一侧的形状则与上述形状对应，以使得线保护套172能够直接或者间接得贴合在第一安装槽111的底部。
在一个应用场景中，请进一步结合图7，线保护套172与眼镜框11之间设置有粘胶层18，以通过粘胶层18将线保护套172固定于第一安装槽111内。
其中，粘胶层18可以设置在第一安装槽111的底部，也可以进一步向两侧延伸设置在第一安装槽111的底部附近的侧壁上，从而能够使得粘胶层18包绕线保护套172，以将连接线17更加牢固的固定在第一安装槽111内。
具体地，本应用场景中，第一安装槽111的截面为矩形，第一安装槽111的底部和线保护套172朝向第一安装槽111的底部的一侧均为平面设置，粘胶层18为设置于二者之间的双面胶层。
进一步地，在一实施方式中，线保护套172朝向眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131的一侧设置有与线本体171对应的凸起部1721，眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131上设置有用于接收凸起部1721的避位槽1311。
具体地，线本体171的截面可以为圆形，线保护套172可在线本体171朝向第一安装槽111的底部的一侧与线本体171平齐，而在线本体171背离第一安装槽111的底部的一侧仍然呈现出线本体171的形状，从而形成对应的凸起部1721。
进一步地，眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131需进一步设置于第一安装槽111内，本实施方式中进一步在顶侧边缘131上设置用于接收突起部1721的避位槽1311，从而使得在第一安装槽111内装设的连接线17至少部分容置于顶侧边缘131对应的避位槽1311中。
进一步地，凸起部1721沿线保护套172的宽度方向位于线保护套172的中间区域，以在凸起部1721的两侧形成抵接部1722，两个抵接部1722分别与避位槽1311两侧的顶侧边缘131抵接。其中，线保护套172的宽度方向是指垂直于线保护套172沿第一安装槽111的走向的方向，具体如图10中的W所指示的方向。
容易理解地，第一安装槽111的深度有限，若将眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131与连接线17的凸起部1721平齐设置，或者线保护套172与线本体171背离第一安装槽111底部的一侧与线本体171平齐设置，则会减小眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131在第一安装槽111中的插入深度，从而不利于眼镜片13在眼镜框11中稳固安装。而本实施方式中，眼镜片13的顶侧边缘131通过避位槽1311避过部分连接线17，使得顶侧边缘131能够相对于避位槽1311进一步朝向第一安装槽111的底部方向延伸并与凸起部1721两侧的抵接部1722抵接在一起，从而能够在一定程度上减小连接线17占用第一安装槽111内的空间，使得眼镜片13能够更加深得安装在第一安装槽111内，从而提高眼镜片13在眼镜框11中安装的稳定性。
在一个应用场景中，眼镜框11较薄，至少部分的凸起部1721露出于第一安装槽111的外部，以减少连接线17所占用的眼镜框的空间，从而减小第一安装槽111的深度，提高眼镜框11的稳定性。
其中，请进一步结合图2、图12，图12是图7中B部分的局部结构示意图。在一实施方式中，第一扣位1321包括第一子边缘13211、第二子边缘13212和第三子边缘13213。
其中，第一子边缘13211与顶侧边缘131相邻设置，第二子边缘13212远离顶侧边缘131且与第一子边缘13211相对设置，第三子边缘13213则于第一子边缘13211和第二子边缘13212远离眼镜片13的一侧连接第一子边缘13211和第二子边缘13212。
本实施方式中，线保护套172进一步沿第一子边缘13211延伸至第一扣位槽112内。
通过上述方式，将线保护套172保持在第一安装槽111内并延伸至第一扣位槽112以隐藏在眼镜框11中，从而在用户使用过程中拆装眼镜片13时，线保护套172不会在眼镜片13拆卸下来后外露出来，以保持眼镜的美观。
进一步地，线保护套172在向第一扣位槽112延伸时，截止于第一子边缘13211与第三子边缘13213的连接处。当然，线保护套172也可以不截止而随线本体171继续延伸，只要使得在拆卸眼镜片13时线保护套172不会露出即可。
请进一步一并参阅图13，图13是本申请眼镜一实施方式的局部结构的截面放大示意图。本实施方式中的眼镜进一步包括转轴组件19。
其中，转轴组件19的数量为两个，分别用于连接眼镜框11和两条眼镜腿15，以使得眼镜框11和眼镜腿15能够绕转轴组件19进行相对转动。其中，转轴组件19沿轴向设置有转轴走线通道191，连接线17穿设于转轴走线通道191内并分别延伸至眼镜框11及眼镜腿15。
具体地，本实施方式中的连接线17通过转轴走线通道191后，一端直接延伸至一条眼镜腿15，另一端进入至眼镜框11，并沿第一安装槽111进一步延伸至另一条眼镜腿15，进而电连接分别位于两条眼镜腿15内的两个功能组件16。
本实施方式中，转轴走线通道附近的连接线17可以不包括线保护套172。转轴走线通道191可以贯穿转轴组件19。
容易理解地，眼镜框11和眼镜腿15之间发生折叠时，转轴组件19附近的结构的相对位 置会产生改变，而此时，若位于眼镜框11和眼镜腿15之间的连接处的连接线17直接绕转轴组件19的外围设置，那么此处的连接线17将会随着眼镜框11或者眼镜腿15的折叠而发生挤压或拉扯，甚至变形、断裂，从而影响连接线17的稳定性，缩短连接线17的使用寿命。
而本实施方式中，转轴组件19沿轴向设置有转轴走线通道191，位于眼镜框11和眼镜腿15的连接处的连接线17贯穿于该转轴走线通道191内部，从而在眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间发生折叠时，位于转轴走线通道191内的连接线17仅会随转轴组件19的转动而产生一定量的旋转，以减少对连接线17的折叠挤压或拉扯，从而对连接线17起到一定的保护作用，提高连接线17的稳定性，延长连接线17的使用寿命。
其中，本实施方式中转轴走线通道191的内径大于连接线17的外径。例如，转轴走线通道191的内径可以为连接线17的外径的两倍。从而能够减小转轴走线通道191的内侧壁对连接线17的束缚作用，以在眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间发生折叠时减小连接线17的转动幅度。
请进一步一并参阅图13和图14，图14是本申请眼镜一实施方式中转轴组件的与连接线结构示意图。本实施方式中，转轴组件19包括第一转轴192，第一转轴192的两端分别连接眼镜框11和眼镜腿15，转轴走线通道191沿第一转轴192的轴向设置，转轴走线通道191通过设置于第一转轴192的至少一端面上的走线口1921与外部连通，连接线17经走线口1921延伸至眼镜框11或眼镜腿15。
需要指出的是，本实施方式中第一转轴192可与眼镜框11和眼镜腿15的其中之一转动连接，并与其中另一固定连接，以使得眼镜框11和眼镜腿15绕第一转轴192转动连接。
具体地，本实施方式中，转轴走线通道191设置于第一转轴192内，并进一步通过走线口1921与外部连通。
具体地，转轴走线通道191贯穿第一转轴192的至少一端面而形成转轴走线通道191的走线口1921，从而使连接线17能够通过第一转轴192的至少一端面由转轴走线通道191延伸而出，进而延伸至眼镜框11或眼镜腿15。容易理解地，第一转轴192的端面外围具有较大的活动空间，由该第一转轴192的端面延伸而出的连接线17能够容置于该活动空间之内，而若该端面处第一转轴192与对应的眼镜框11或眼镜腿15是转动连接，那么当眼镜框11和眼镜腿15之间发生折叠转动时，该端面上的走线口1921附近的连接线17随着第一转轴192的转动而发生一定的程度的扭转时能够通过该活动空间进行适当的缓冲，并能够变扭转为移动，从而进一步降低连接线17的扭转程度，提高连接线17的稳定性。
请参阅图15，图15是本申请眼镜一实施方式中第一转轴的结构示意图。本实施方式中，走线口1921包括第一走线口19211和第二走线口19212，并分别设置于第一转轴192的两端面，转轴走线通道191分别通过两个走线口1921与外部连通，从而使得连接线17贯穿第一转轴192的两端面并经第一走线口19211和第二走线口19212分别延伸至眼镜框11和眼镜腿15。
也就是说，本应用场景中，眼镜框11和眼镜腿15之间的连接处的连接线17设置于第一转轴192内的转轴走线通道191中，并分别通过第一转轴192的两端面由转轴走线通道191延伸而 出。此时，由于第一转轴192的两端面外围均有较大的活动空间，因此由第一转轴192两端面延伸而出的连接线17在眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间发生相对转动时仅发生移动或小幅度扭转而均不会发生挤压拉扯而变形。
请继续参阅图14，本实施方式中，走线口1921包括第一走线口19213和第二走线口19214。其中，第一走线口19213设置于第一转轴192的端面上，第二走线口19214则设置于第一转轴192的侧壁上，使得转轴走线通道191一端沿轴向通过第一走线口19213贯通第一转轴192的端面，另一端通过第二走线口19214贯通第一转轴192的侧壁，进而与外部连通，连接线17经第一走线口19213和第二走线口19214分别延伸至眼镜框11和眼镜腿15。
同样地，设置第一走线口19213的第一转轴192端面附近具有较大的活动空间，在眼镜框11和眼镜腿15之间发生相对运动时，第一走线口19213附近的连接线17仅发生相对移动，或者小幅度的扭转。
在一个应用场景中，第一转轴192与眼镜框11和眼镜腿15中靠近第二走线口19214设置的一者固定连接，且与眼镜框11和眼镜腿15中靠近第一走线口19213设置的另一者转动连接。也就是说，第一转轴192在设置于端面的走线口1921处与眼镜框11或眼镜腿15中的一个转动连接，而第一转轴192在设置于侧壁的走线口1921处与眼镜框11或眼镜腿15中的另一个固定连接。
在一个应用场景中，第一转轴192在第一走线口19213处靠近眼镜框11，并与眼镜框11转动连接，第一转轴192在第二走线口19214处靠近眼镜腿15，并与眼镜腿15固定连接。
需要指出的是，本应用场景中，虽然第一转轴192与眼镜框11转动连接，在眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间发生相对转动时会带动连接线17在第一走线口19213处发生相对运动，但是由于第一走线口19213设置于第一转轴192的端面上，与上述实施方式中类似，第一转轴192的端面处具有较大的活动空间，而当眼镜框11和眼镜腿15之间发生折叠转动时，该端面上的走线口1921附近的连接线17随着第一转轴192的转动而发生一定的程度的扭转时能够通过该活动空间进行适当的缓冲，并能够变扭转为移动，或者小幅度的扭转，而不会对连接线产生挤压或拉扯，从而能够提高连接线的稳定性以及延长连接线的使用寿命。
另外，第一转轴192在第二走线口19214处与眼镜腿15固定连接，容易理解地，在眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间发生相对转动时，眼镜腿11与第一转轴192之间保持同步，因此，转轴走线通道191内的连接线17经第二走线口19214延伸入眼镜腿11的连接线17不会发生扭转、挤压、拉扯。因此，此时第二走线口19214无论是设置在第一转轴192的端面上还是设置在第一转轴192的侧壁上，眼镜框11和眼镜腿15之间的相对转动均不会对此处的连接线17产生上述扭转、挤压、拉扯等。
而在其它实施方式中，若在第二走线口19214处第一转轴192与眼镜腿15转动连接，在二者之间发生相对转动而带动连接线17发生移动时，会受到第二走线口19214处第一转轴192的侧壁的约束，从而使得连接线17受到第一转轴192的侧壁与眼镜腿15之间的挤压。
若第一转轴192在第一走线口19213处靠近眼镜腿15，并与眼镜腿15转动连接，第一转 轴192在第二走线口19214处靠近眼镜框11，并与眼镜框11固定连接，同样的道理，在眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间发生折叠时，转轴走线通道191内及第一走线口19213和第二走线口19214附近的连接线17仍然仅是发生小幅度扭转或者移动。
请继续参阅图14，在一实施方式中，转轴组件19进一步包括与第一转轴192同轴且间隔的第二转轴193。
本实施方式中，第二转轴193设置在第一转轴192靠近第一走线口19213的一侧。当然，在其他实施方式中，第二转轴193也可以设置在第一转轴192靠近第二走线口19214的一侧。
请进一步参阅图16，图16是本申请眼镜一实施方式的局部爆炸图。本实施方式中，眼镜框11包括第一凸耳113，具体地，第一凸耳113的数量为两个，分别设置在眼镜框11连接两条眼镜腿15的两端，并分别凸出朝向对应的眼镜腿15。
眼镜腿15包括间隔设置的第二凸耳1501和第三凸耳1502。其中，第二凸耳1501和第三凸耳1502均朝向所在的眼镜腿15所连接的眼镜框11的端部。且在用户佩戴该眼镜时，第二凸耳1501和第三凸耳1502于远离用户头部的一侧连接在一起，从而使得眼镜在外观上更加整体更加美观。在一个应用场景中，间隔设置的第二凸耳1501和第三凸耳1502通过在眼镜腿15朝向眼镜框11的一端的中部设置凹槽而形成。
进一步地，第一转轴192和第二转轴193互相靠近的端部均与第一凸耳113连接，第一转轴192和第二转轴193互相远离的端部分别与第二凸耳1501和第三凸耳1502连接，以将第一凸耳113保持在第二凸耳1501与第三凸耳1502之间。
其中，请继续参阅图14，在一实施方式中，第一走线口19213设置于第一转轴192靠近第二转轴193的端面，第二走线口19214设置于第一转轴192靠近第二凸耳1501的侧壁上，第一转轴192与第一凸耳113转动连接，并与第二凸耳1501固定连接。
具体地，本实施方式中，转轴走线通道191内的连接线17的一端由第一走线口19213并经过第一转轴192与第二转轴193之间的间隔延伸而出。进一步地，在一应用场景中，第一凸耳113设置有与第一走线口19213连通的走线通道，从而使得连接线17进一步由第一凸耳113进入眼镜框11。
另外，转轴走线通道191内的连接线17的另一端由第二走线口19214延伸而出。进一步地，在一应用场景中，第三凸耳1502设置有与第二走线口19214连通的走线通道，从而使得连接线17能够进一步经由第三凸耳1502的走线通道进入眼镜腿15。
其中，第二走线口19214可以为设置在第一转轴192的侧壁上而不与第一转轴192的端部贯通的一与转轴走线通道191连通的通孔。本实施方式中，第二走线口19214进一步沿第一转轴192的侧壁贯通至第一转轴192远离第一走线口19213的端部。容易理解地，本实施方式中的第二走线口19214处具有更大的空间，从而在此处的连接线17因一些原因而产生移动时，能够进一步减小对连接线17的限制，进一步减少因第一转轴192的侧壁的阻挡而受到的损伤。
请进一步一并参阅图16、图17和图18，图17为本申请眼镜一实施方式中眼镜框与眼镜 片的结构示意图，图18为本申请眼镜一实施方式中眼镜腿的局部结构示意图。本实施方式中，第一凸耳113和第二凸耳1501分别同轴设置有第一容置孔1131和第二容置孔15011，其中第一容置孔1131和第二容置孔15011的尺寸设置成允许第一转轴192从眼镜腿15的外部经第二容置孔15011插入到第一容置孔1131内，并且使得第一转轴192与第二容置孔15011过盈配合且与第一容置孔1131间隙配合。
具体地，第二容置孔15011为贯通第二凸耳1501的通孔，第一容置孔1131则对应于第二容置孔15011贯穿至少部分第一凸耳113。其中，第一容置孔1131的内径大于第二容置孔15011，第一转轴的外径尺寸介于第一容置孔1131与第二容置孔15011之间，从而使得第一转轴192与眼镜腿15固定连接，而与眼镜框11转动连接，从而使得眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间能够绕第一转轴192转动而折叠或打开。
进一步地，在一实施方式中，第一凸耳113和第三凸耳1502分别同轴设置有第三容置孔1132和第四容置孔15021，其中第三容置孔1132和第四容置孔15021的尺寸设置成允许第二转轴193从眼镜腿15的外部经第四容置孔15021插入到第三容置孔1132内，并且使得第二转轴193与第三容置孔1132过盈配合且与第四容置孔15021间隙配合，或使得第二转轴193与第三容置孔1132间隙配合且与第四容置孔15021过盈配合。
本实施方式中，第三容置孔1132和第四容置孔15021均与第一容置孔1131和第二容置孔15011同轴设置。其中，第三容置孔1132贯穿至少部分第一凸耳113，在一个应用场景中，第一容置孔1131与第三容置孔1132同轴且贯通设置。具体地，如上述实施方式中所述，眼镜框11的第一凸耳113设置有与第一走线口19213连通的走线通道，第一容置孔1131与第三容置孔1132分别设置于该位于第一凸耳113内的走线通道的两侧，并均贯通该走线通道。第四容置孔15021贯通第三凸耳1502设置。其中，第二转轴193的外径尺寸介于第三容置孔1132与第四容置孔15021的内径之间，且第三容置孔1132的内径大于第四容置孔15021，或者，第四容置孔15021的内径大于第三容置孔1132，从而使得第二转轴193与眼镜腿15固定连接，而与眼镜框11转动连接，或者第二转轴193与眼镜框11固定连接，而与眼镜腿15转动连接，进而使得眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间能够绕第一转轴192转动而折叠或打开。
其中，在一实施方式中，第二转轴193可以为实心轴，其直径小于第一转轴192的直径。在佩戴状态下，第二转轴193位于眼镜腿15的上侧，第一转轴192位于眼镜腿15的下侧。
需要指出的是，由于转轴走线通道191设置在第一转轴192的内部，从而使得第一转轴192的外径较大，而不利于满足用户在美观上的需求。因此，本实施方式中进一步设置具有较小外径的第二转轴193，并使得在用户佩戴眼镜时，第二转轴193设置在容易被发现的上部，而第一转轴192则设置在不容易被观察到的下部，由于第二转轴193的外径较小，从而能够在一定程度上改善眼镜的整体美观效果。
当然，在其它实施方式中，第一转轴192和第二转轴193也可以为其它情况，例如，第二转轴193还可以为空心轴，且第二转轴193的直径也可以大于第一转轴192的直径，或者，在佩戴 状态下，第二转轴193位于眼镜腿15的下侧，第一转轴192位于眼镜腿15的上侧等，此处不做限定。
另外，请继续参阅图14，第一转轴192的用于设置第一走线口19213的端面1922与第一转轴192的用于定义转轴走线通道191的内壁面1923的连接处呈弧形设计。容易理解地，在眼镜框11与眼镜腿15之间通过转轴组件19进行转动时，由于第一转轴192与眼镜框11之间为转动连接，从而会带动第一走线口19213处的连接线17移动，本实施方式中，将第一转轴192的上述端面1922与内壁面1923的连接处进行弧形设计，能够避免在第一走线口19213处的连接线17移动并与第一转轴192接触时因上述连接处过于尖锐而割伤连接线17，从而进一步对连接线17起到保护作用。
在一个应用场景中，第一转轴192的用于设置第二走线口19214的端面与第一转轴192的用于定义转轴走线通道191的内壁面1923的连接处也呈弧形设计，同样地，通过这种方式也能够进一步对连接线17起到保护作用。
需要注意的是，以上对眼镜中转轴组件和布线的描述仅仅是具体的示例，不应被视为是唯一可行的实施方案。显然，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解眼镜中转轴组件和布线的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施眼镜中转轴组件和布线的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，但是这些修正和改变仍在以上描述的范围之内。例如，分支电路板还可以包括第三焊盘和第三软性电路板。诸如此类的变形，均在本申请的保护范围之内。
图19是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的骨传导扬声组件的纵截面示意图。需要注意的是，图19中骨传导扬声组件200与图1中的耳机芯102和机芯壳体108项相对应，耳机壳体220与图1中的机芯壳体108向对应。如图19所示，在一些实施例中，骨传导扬声组件200可以包括磁路组件210、线圈212、传振片214、连接件216以及耳机壳体220。磁路组件210可以包括第一磁性元件202、第一导磁元件204和第二导磁元件206。
在一些实施例中，耳机壳体220可以包括外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226。外壳背面224位于与外壳面板222相对的一面，并分别设置在外壳侧面226的两端面上。外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226形成具有一定容置空间的整体结构。在一些实施例中，磁路组件210、线圈212和传振片214固定在耳机壳体220内部。在一些实施例中，骨传导扬声组件200还可以包括外壳支架228，传振片214可以通过外壳支架228与耳机壳体220连接，线圈212可以固定在外壳支架228上，并通过外壳支架228带动外壳220振动。在一些实施例中，外壳支架228可以是耳机壳体220的一部分，也可以是单独的组件，直接或者间接连接于耳机壳体220的内部。在一些实施例中，外壳支架228可以固定在外壳侧面226的内表面上。在一些实施例中，外壳支架228可以通过胶水粘贴在耳机壳体220上，也可以通过冲压、注塑、卡接、铆接、螺纹连接或焊接固定在壳体220上。
在一些实施例中，可以通过设计外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226的连接方式确保耳机壳体220具有较大的刚度。例如，外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226可以是一 体成型。又例如，外壳背面224和外壳侧面226可以是一体成型结构。外壳面板222和外壳侧面226可以通过胶水直接粘贴固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定。所述胶水可以是粘性强、硬度较大的胶水。再例如，外壳面板222和外壳侧面226可以是一体成型结构，外壳背面224和外壳侧面226之间可以通过胶水直接粘贴固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定。在一些实施例中，外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226都是独立的部件，三者之间可以通过胶水、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接方式中的一种或任意几种的组合进行固定连接。例如，外壳面板222和外壳侧面226之间通过胶水连接，外壳背面224和外壳侧面226之间通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接进行连接。或是外壳背面224和外壳侧面226之间通过胶水连接，外壳面板222和外壳侧面226之间通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接进行连接。
在不同的应用场景中，本申请中所描述的壳体可以通过不同的装配方式制成。例如，如本申请中其他地方的描述，壳体可以是一体成型的方式，也可以是分体组合的方式，或者两者相结合的方式。在分体组合的方式中，不同分体之间可以采用胶水粘贴固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定。具体地，为了更好地理解本申请中骨传导耳机的壳体的装配方式，图20-24描述了几种壳体的装配方式的示例。
如图20所示，骨传导扬声组件主要包括磁路组件2210和壳体。在一些实施例中，磁路组件2210可以包括第一磁性元件2202、第一导磁元件2204和第二导磁元件2206。壳体可以包括外壳面板2222，外壳背面2224和外壳侧面2226。外壳侧面2226和外壳背面2224由一体成型的方式制成，外壳面板2222通过分件组合的方式连接到外壳侧面2226的一端。所述分件组合的方式包括使用胶水粘结固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式将外壳面板2222固定在外壳侧面2226的一端。外壳面板2222和外壳侧面2226(或者外壳背面2224)可以采用不同、相同或者部分相同的材料制成。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和外壳侧面2226采用相同的材料制成，且所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于2000MPa。更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于4000MPa，更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于6000MPa，更优选地，耳机壳体220材料的杨氏模量大于8000MPa，更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于12000MPa，更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于15000MPa，进一步优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于18000MPa。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和外壳侧面2226采用不同的材料制成，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于4000MPa。更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于6000MPa，更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于8000MPa，更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于12000MPa，更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于15000MPa，进一步优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于18000MPa。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料包括但不限于丙烯腈-丁二烯-苯乙烯共聚物(AcrYlonitrile butadiene stYrene,ABS)、聚苯乙烯(PolYstYrene,PS)、高冲击聚苯乙烯(High impact polYstYrene,HIPS)、聚丙烯(PolYpropYlene,PP)、聚对苯二甲酸乙二酯(PolYethYlene terephthalate,PET)、聚酯(PolYester,PES)、聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)、聚酰胺(PolYamides,PA)、聚氯乙烯(PolYvinYl chloride,PVC)、聚氨酯(PolYurethanes,PU)、聚二氯乙烯(PolYvinYlidene chloride)、 聚乙烯(PolYethYlene,PE)、聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯(PolYmethYl methacrYlate,PMMA)、聚醚醚酮(PolYetheretherketone,PEEK)、酚醛树脂(Phenolics,PF)、尿素甲醛树脂(Urea-formaldehYde,UF)、三聚氰胺-甲醛树脂(Melamine formaldehYde,MF)以及一些金属、合金(如铝合金、铬钼钢、钪合金、镁合金、钛合金、镁锂合金、镍合金等)、玻璃纤维或碳纤维中的任意材料或上述任意材料的组合。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222的材料为玻璃纤维、碳纤维与聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)、聚酰胺(PolYamides,PA)等材料的任意组合。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料可以是碳纤维和聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)按照一定比例混合制成。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料可以是碳纤维、玻璃纤维和聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)按照一定比例混合制成。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料可以是玻璃纤维和聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)按照一定比例混合制成，也可以使玻璃纤维和聚酰胺(PolYamides,PA)按照一定比例混合制成。
在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222、外壳背面2224和外壳侧面2226形成具有一定容置空间的整体结构。在所述整体结构内，传振片2214通过连接件2216与磁路组件2210连接。磁路组件2210的两侧分别连接第一导磁元件2204和第二导磁元件2206。传振片2214通过外壳支架2228固定在所述整体结构的内部。在一些实施例中，外壳侧面2226上具有用于支撑外壳支架2228的台阶结构。在外壳支架2228固定于外壳侧面2226后，外壳面板2222可以同时固定在外壳支架2228和外壳侧面2226上，或者单独固定在外壳支架2228或外壳侧面2226上。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳侧面2226和外壳支架2228可以一体成型。在一些实施例中，外壳支架2228可以直接固定在外壳面板2222上(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。固定后的外壳面板2222和外壳支架2228再与外壳侧面固定(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳支架2228和外壳面板2222可以一体成型。
在另一具体的实施例中，如图21所示，骨传导扬声组件主要包括磁路组件2240和壳体。其中，磁路组件2240可以包括第一磁性元件2232、第一导磁元件2234和第二导磁元件2236。在整体结构内，传振片2244通过连接件2246与磁路组件2240连接。该实施例与图20提供的实施例不同之处在于，外壳支架2258和外壳侧面2256一体成型。外壳面板2252固定在外壳侧面2256上与外壳支架2258连接的一侧(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)，外壳背面2254固定在外壳侧面2256的另一侧(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳支架2258和外壳侧面2256是分体组合的结构，并且外壳面板2252，外壳背面2254，外壳支架2258和外壳侧面2256之间都是通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定连接。
在另一具体的实施例中，如图22所示，该实施例中的骨传导扬声组件主要包括磁路组件2270和壳体。其中，磁路组件2270可以包括第一磁性元件2262、第一导磁元件2264和第二导磁元件2266。在整体结构内，传振片2274通过连接件2276与磁路组件2270连接。该实施例与图21提供的实施例的不同之处在于，外壳面板2282和外壳侧面2286一体成型。外壳背面2284固定在外 壳侧面2286上相对于外壳面板2282的一侧(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。外壳支架2288通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式固定在外壳面板2282和/或外壳侧面2286上。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳支架2288，外壳面板2282和外壳侧面2286是一体成型的结构。
图23是根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种骨传导扬声组件的壳体结构示意图。如图23所示，壳体700可以包括外壳面板710、外壳背面720和外壳侧面730。外壳面板710与人体接触，将骨传导扬声组件的振动传递给人体的听觉神经。在一些实施例中，当壳体700的整体刚度较大时，在一定的频率范围内，外壳面板710和外壳背面720的振动幅度和相位保持相同或基本相同(外壳侧面730不压缩空气因而不产生漏音)，使得外壳面板710产生的第一漏音信号和外壳背面720产生的第二漏音信号能够相互叠加。所述叠加可以减小第一漏音声波或第二漏音声波的幅值，从而达到降低壳体700漏音的目的。在一些实施例中，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于500Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于600Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于800Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于1000Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于2000Hz的部分。更优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于5000Hz的部分。更优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于8000Hz的部分。进一步优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于10000Hz的部分。
在一些实施例中，骨传导扬声组件的壳体的刚度会影响壳体上不同部位(例如，外壳面板、外壳背面和/或外壳侧面)的振动幅度和相位，从而影响骨传导扬声组件的漏音。在一些实施例中，当骨传导扬声组件的壳体具有比较大的刚度时，外壳面板和外壳背面能够在较高的频率下保持相同或者基本相同的振动幅度和相位，从而显著减小骨传导耳机的漏音。
在一些实施例中，较高的频率可以包括不小于1000Hz的频率，例如，1000Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1100Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1300Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1500Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1700Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1900Hz-2000Hz之间的频率。优选地，这里所说的较高的频率可以包括不小于2000Hz的频率，例如，2000Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2100Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2300Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2500Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2700Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，或者2900Hz-3000Hz之间的频率。优选地，较高的频率可以包括不小于4000Hz的频率，例如，4000Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4100Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4300Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4500Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4700Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，或者4900Hz-5000Hz之间的频率。更优选地，较高的频率可以包括不小于6000Hz的频率，例如，6000Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，6100Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，6300Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，6500Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，7000Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，7500Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，或者7900Hz-8000Hz之间的频率。进一步优选地，较高的频率可以包括不小于8000Hz的频率，例如，8000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，8100Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，8300Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，8500Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，9000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，10000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，或者11000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率。
外壳面板和外壳背面保持相同或者基本相同的振动幅度是指所述外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在一定的范围之内。例如，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.3到3之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.4到2.5之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.5到1.5之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.6到1.4之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.7到1.2之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.75到1.15之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.8到1.1之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.85到1.1之间，进一步优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.9到1.05之间。在一些实施例中，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动可以用其他能够表征其振动幅度的物理量来表示。例如，可以分别用空间中一点处由外壳面板和外壳背面产生的声压来表征外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度。
外壳面板和外壳背面保持相同或者基本相同的振动相位是指所述外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在一定的范围之内。例如，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-90°到90°之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-80°到80°之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-60°到60°之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-45°到45°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-30°到30°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-20°到20°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-15°到15°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-12°到12°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-10°到10°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-8°到8°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-6°到6°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-5°到5°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-4°到4°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-3°到3°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-2°到2°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-1°到1°之间，进一步优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值为0°。
需要注意的是，以上对骨传导扬声组件的描述仅仅是具体的示例，不应被视为是唯一可行的实施方案。显然，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解骨传导扬声组件的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施骨传导扬声组件的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，但是这些修正和改变仍在以上描述的范围之内。例如，外壳侧面、外壳背面和外壳支架可以是一体成型结构。诸如此类的变形，均在本申请的保护范围之内。
图24是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种扬声组件的纵截面示意图。如图24所示，扬声组件300可以包括第一磁性元件302、第一导磁元件304、第二导磁元件306、第一振动板308、音圈310、第二振动板312以及振动面板314。其中，扬声组件300与图19中磁路组件210向对应。。在一些实施例中，磁路组件可以包括第一磁性元件302、第一导磁元件304、第二导磁元件306。磁路组件可以产生第一全磁场(也可被称为“磁路组件的总磁场”或“第一磁场”)。
在本申请中描述的磁性元件是指可以产生磁场的元件，例如磁铁等。所述磁性元件可以具有磁化方向，所述磁化方向是指在所述磁性元件内部的磁场方向。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件302可以包括一个或多个磁铁，第一磁性元件可以产生第二磁场。在一些实施例中，所述磁铁可以包括金属合金磁铁，铁氧体等。其中，金属合金磁铁可以包括钕铁硼、钐钴、铝镍钴、铁铬钴、铝铁硼、铁碳铝，或类似的，或其中多种的组合。铁氧体可以包括钡铁氧体，钢铁氧体，美锰铁氧体，锂锰铁氧体，或类似的，或其中多种组合。
在一些实施例中，第一导磁元件304的下表面可以连接第一磁性元件302的上表面。第二导磁元件306可以连接第一磁性元件302。需要注意的是，这里所说的导磁体也可以称为磁场集中器或铁芯。导磁体可以调整磁场(例如，第一磁性元件302产生的第二磁场)的分布。所述导磁体可以包括由软磁材料加工而成的元件。在一些实施例中，所述软磁材料可以包括金属材料、金属合金、金属氧化物材料、非晶金属材料等，例如铁、铁硅系合金、铁铝系合金、镍铁系合金、铁钴系合金、低碳钢、硅钢片、矽钢片、铁氧体等。在一些实施例中，可以通过铸造、塑性加工、切削加工、粉末冶金等一种或多种组合的方法加工所述导磁体。铸造可以包括砂型铸造、熔模铸造、压力铸造、离心铸造等；塑性加工可以包括轧制、铸造、锻造、冲压、挤压、拔制等一种或多种组合；切削加工可以包括车削、铣削、刨削、磨削等。在一些实施例中，所述导磁体的加工方法可以包括3D打印、数控机床等。第一导磁元件304、第二导磁元件306与第一磁性元件302之间的连接方式可以包括粘接、卡接、焊接、铆接、螺栓连接等一种或多种组合。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件302、第一导磁元件304和第二导磁元件306可以设置为轴对称结构。所述轴对称结构可以是环状结构、柱状结构或是其它具有轴对称结构。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件302与第二导磁元件306之间可以形成磁间隙。音圈310可以设置于所述磁间隙中。音圈310可以与第一振动板308连接。第一振动板308可以连接第二振动板312，第二振动板312可以连接振动面板314。当所述音圈310内通入电流后，所述音圈310位于在第一磁性元件302、第一导磁元件304和第二导磁元件306形成的磁场，会受到安培力作用，所述安培力驱动音圈310振动，音圈310的振动会带动第一振动板308、第二振动板312和振动面板314的振动。振动面板314将所述振动通过组织与骨骼传递到听觉神经，从而使人听到声音。所述振动面板314可以直接与人体皮肤接触，或可以通过由特定材料组成的振动传递层与皮肤接触。
在一些实施例中，对于具有单一磁性元件的扬声组件，通过音圈处的磁感线并不均匀，呈发散状。同时磁路中可能会形成漏磁，即较多的磁感线泄漏至磁间隙以外，未能穿过音圈，从而使得音圈位置处的磁感应强度(或磁场强度)下降，影响扬声组件的灵敏度。因此，扬声组件300可以进一步包括至少一个第二磁性元件和/至少一个第三导磁元件(图中未示)。所述至少一个第二磁性元件和/至少一个第三导磁元件可以抑制磁感线的泄露，约束穿过音圈的磁感线形态，使得较多的磁感线尽量水平密集地穿过音圈，增强音圈位置处的磁感应强度(或磁场强度)，从而提高扬声组件300的灵敏度，进而提高扬声组件300的机械转化效率(即，将输入扬声组件300的电能转化为音圈振动的机械能的效率)。
图25是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2100的纵截面示意图。如图25所示，磁路组件2100可以包括第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和/或第二磁性元件2108可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种磁铁。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102可以包括第一磁铁，第二磁性元件2108可以包括第二磁铁，所述第一磁铁与所述第二磁铁可以相同或不同。第一导磁元件2104和/或第二导磁元件2106可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种导磁材料。第一导磁元件2104和/或第二导磁元件2106的加工方法可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种加工方式。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104可以设置为轴对称结构。例如，第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104可以是圆柱体，长方体，或者中空的环状(例如，横截面为跑道的形状)。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和第一导磁元件2104可以是共轴的圆柱体，含有相同或者不同的直径。在一些实施例中，第二导磁元件2106可以是凹槽型结构。所述凹槽型结构可以包含U型的剖面(如图24所示)。所述凹槽型的第二导磁元件2106可以包括底板和侧壁。在一些实施例中，所述底板和所述侧壁可以是一体成型的，例如，所述侧壁可以由底板在垂直于底板的方向进行延伸形成。在一些实施例中，所述底板可以通过本申请中描述的任意一种或几种连接方式连接所述侧壁。第二磁性元件2108可以设定为环状或片状。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以是环状的。第二磁性元件2108可以包括内环以及外环。在一些实施例中，所述内环和/或外环的形状可以是圆形、椭圆、三角形、四边形或其它任意多边形在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以由多个磁体排列组成。所述多个磁体的任意一个磁体的两端可以与相邻的磁体的两端连接或存在一定的间距。多个磁体之间的间距可以相同或不同。在一些实施例中，所述第二磁性元件2108可以由2个或3个片状的磁体等距排列构成。所述片状的磁体的形状可以是扇形、四边形等。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以与第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104共轴。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的上表面可以连接第一导磁元件2104的下表面。第一磁性元件2102的下表面可以连接第二导磁元件306的底板。第二磁性元件2108的下表面连接第二导磁元件2106的侧壁。第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106和/或第二磁性元件2108之间的连接方式可以包括粘接、卡接、焊接、铆接、螺栓连接等一种或多种组合。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104与第二磁性元件2108的内环之间形成磁间隙。音圈2128可以设置于所述磁间隙中。在一些实施例中，所述第二磁性元件2108与所述音圈2128相对于第二导磁元件2106的底板的高度相等。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108可以形成磁回路。在一些实施例中，磁路组件2100可以产生第一全磁场(也可被称为“磁路组件的总磁场”或“第一磁场”)，第一磁性元件2102可以产生第二磁场。所述第一全磁场由所述磁路组件2100中的所有组分(例如，第一磁性元件2102，第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108)产生的磁场共同形成。所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度(也可以被称为磁感应强度或者磁通量密度)大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以产生第三 磁场，所述第三磁场可以提高所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙处的磁场强度。这里所说的第三磁场提高第一全磁场的磁场强度指的是，在有第三磁场存在(即，存在第二磁性元件2108)时第一全磁场在所述磁间隙的磁场强度大于没有第三磁场存在(即，不存在第二磁性元件2108)时第一全磁场的。在本说明书中的其他实施例中，除非特别说明，磁路组件表示包含所有磁性元件和导磁元件的结构，第一全磁场表示由磁路组件整体产生的磁场，第二磁场、第三磁场、……、第N磁场分别表示由相应的磁性元件所产生的磁场。在不同的实施例中，产生所述第二磁场(或者第三磁场、……、第N磁场)的磁性元件可以是相同的，也可以不同。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角等于或大于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件302的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图中a所示方向)，第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向由第二磁性元件2108的内环指向外环(如图中b所方向示，在第一磁性元件2102的右侧，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转90度)。
在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2108的位置，所述第一全磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2108的位置处，第一磁性元件2102产生的磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
与单一磁性元件的磁路组件相比，第二磁性元件2108可以提高磁路组件2100中磁间隙内总磁通量，进而增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。并且，在第二磁性元件2108的作用下，原本发散的磁感线会向磁间隙所在位置收敛，进一步增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。
图26是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的磁路组件2600的纵截面示意图。如图26所示，磁路组件2600与磁路组件2100的不同之处在于，其可以进一步包括至少一个导电元件(例如，第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122)。
所述导电元件可以包括金属材料、金属合金材料、无机非金属材料或其它导电材料。金属材料可以包括金、银、铜、铝等；金属合金材料可以包括铁基合金、铝基合金材料、铜基合金、锌基合金等；无机非金属材料可以包括石墨等。所述导电元件可以是片状、环状、网状等。第一导电元件2118可以设置于第一导磁元件2104的上表面。第二导电元件2120可以连接第一磁性元件2102以及第二导磁元件2106。第三导电元件2122可以连接第一磁性元件2102的侧壁。在一些实施例中，第一导磁元件2104可以凸出于第一磁性元件2102形成第一凹部，第三导电元件2122设置于所述第一凹部。在一些实施例中，第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122可以包括相同或不同的导电材料。第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122可以通过本申请中描述的任意一种或多种连接方式分别连接第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106和/或第一磁性元件2102。
第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104与第二磁性元件2108的内环之间形成磁间隙。音圈2128可以设置于所述磁间隙中。第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108可以形成磁回路。在一些实施例中，所述导电元件可以降低音圈2128的感抗。例如，若音圈2128通入第一交变电流时，音圈2128附近会产生第一交变感应磁场。第一交变感应磁场在所述磁回路中磁场的作用下，会使音圈2128产生感抗，阻碍音圈2128的运动。当在音圈2128附近设置导电元件(例如，第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122)，在所述第一交变感应磁场作用下，所述导电元件可以感生出第二交变电流。所述导电元件内的第三交变电流可以在其附近产生第二交变感应磁场，所述第二交变感应磁场与所述第一交变感应磁场方向相反，可以减弱所述第一交变感应磁场，从而减小音圈2128的感抗，增大音圈中的电流，提高扬声组件的灵敏度。
图27是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2700的纵截面示意图。如图27所示，磁路组件2700与磁路组件2500的不同之处在于，磁路组件2700可以进一步包括第三磁性元件2110、第四形磁性元件2112、第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116、第六磁性元件2124以及第七磁性元件2126。第三磁性元件2110、第四磁性元件2112、第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116和/或第六磁性元件2124以及第七磁性元件2126可以设置为共轴的环形柱体。
在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108的上表面连接第七磁性元件2126，第二磁性元件2108的下表面可以连接第三磁性元件2110。第三磁性元件2110可以连接第二导磁元件2106。第七磁性元件2126的上表面可以连接第三导磁元件2116。第四磁性元件2112可以连接第二导磁元件2106以及第一磁性元件2102。第六磁性元件2124可以连接第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116以及第七磁性元件2126。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106、第二磁性元件2108、第三磁性元件2110、第四磁性元件2112、第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116、第六磁性元件2124以及第七磁性元件2126可以形成磁回路以及磁间隙。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2102的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向由第六磁性元件2124的外环指向内环(如图中g方向所示，在第一磁性元件2102的右侧，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转270度)。在一些实施例中，在同一竖直方向上，第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向与第四磁性元件2112的磁化方向可以相同。
在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2124的位置处，磁路组件2700产生的磁场的方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2124的位置处，第一磁性元件2102产生的磁场的方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2102的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向由第七磁性元件2126的下表面指向上表面(如图中f方向所示，在第一磁性元件2102的右侧，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转360度)。在一些实施例中，第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向与第三磁性元件2110的磁化方向可以相反。
在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2126处，磁路组件2700产生的磁场的方向与所述第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2126的位置处，第一磁性元件2102产生的磁场的方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在磁路组件2700中，第三导磁元件2116可以将磁路组件2700产生的磁路封闭，使得较多的磁感线集中于所述磁间隙内，从而达到抑制漏磁、增加磁间隙处的磁感应强度、及提高扬声组件的灵敏度的功效。
图28是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2900的纵截面示意图。如图28所示，磁路组件2900可以包括第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906以及第二磁性元件2908。
第一磁性元件2902的上表面可以连接第一导磁元件2904的下表面，第二磁性元件2908可以连接第一磁性元件2902以及第一全磁场改变元件2906。第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906和/或第二磁性元件2908之间的连接方式可以基于本申请中描述的任意一种或几种连接方式。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906和/或第二磁性元件2908可形成磁回路及磁间隙。
在一些实施例中，磁路组件2900可以产生第一全磁场，第一磁性元件2902可以产生第二磁场，所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2908可以产生第三磁场，所述第三磁场可以提高所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙处的磁场强度。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角可以不高于90度。
在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2908的位置处，所述第一全磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2908的位置处，第一磁性元件2902产生的磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、 20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。又例如，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2902的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向由第二磁性元件2908的外环指向内环(如图中c方向所示，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转270度)。
与单一磁性元件的磁路组件相比，磁路组件2900中的第一全磁场改变元件2906可以提高磁间隙中的总磁通量，进而增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。并且，在第一全磁场改变元件2906的作用下，原本发散的磁感线会向磁间隙所在位置收敛，进一步增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。
图29是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3000的纵截面示意图。如图29所示，在一些实施例中，磁路组件3000可以包括第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906、第二磁性元件2908、第三磁性元件2910、第四磁性元件2912、第五磁性元件2916、第六磁性元件2918、第七磁性元件2920以及第二环形元件2922。第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906、第二磁性元件2908、第三磁性元件2910、第三磁性元件2910、第四磁性元件2912以及第五磁性元件2916。在一些实施例中，第一全磁场改变元件2906和/或第二环形元件2922可以包括环形磁性元件或环形导磁元件。所述环形磁性元件可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种磁铁材料，所述环形导磁元件可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种导磁材料。
在一些实施例中，第六磁性元件2918可以连接第五磁性元件2916以及第二环形元件2922，第七磁性元件2920可以连接第三磁性元件2910以及第二环形元件2922。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902、第五磁性元件2916、第二磁性元件2908、第三磁性元件2910、第四磁性元件2912、第六磁性元件2918和/或第七磁性元件2920与所述第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906以及第二环形元件2922可以形成磁回路。
在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2902的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向由第六磁性元件2918的外环指向内环(如图中f方向所示，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转270度)。在一些实施例中，在同一竖直方向上，第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向可以相同。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2902的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向由第七磁性元件2920的下表面指向上表面(如图中e方向所示，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转360度)。在一些实施例中，第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向与第四磁性元件2912的磁化方向可以相同。
在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2918的位置处，磁路组件2900产生的磁场的方向与所述第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2918的位置处，第一磁性元件2902产生的磁场的方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。
在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2920的位置处，磁路组件3000产生的磁场的方向与所述第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2920的位置处，第一磁性元件2902产生的磁场的方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在一些实施例中，第一全磁场改变元件2906可以是环形磁性元件。在这种情况下，第一全磁场改变元件2906的磁化方向可以与第二磁性元件2908或第四磁性元件2912的磁化方向相同。例如，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一全磁场改变元件2906的磁化方向可以由第一全磁场改变元件2906的外环指向内环。在一些实施例中，第二环形元件2922可以是环形磁性元件。在这种情况下，第二环形元件2922的磁化方向可以与第六磁性元件2918或第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向相同。例如，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第二环形元件2922的磁化方向可以由第二环形元件2922的外环指向内环。
在磁路组件3000中，多个磁性元件可以提高总的磁通量，不同磁性元件相互作用，可以抑制磁感线泄漏，提高磁间隙处的磁感应强度，提高扬声组件的灵敏度。
图30是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3100的纵截面示意图。如图30所示，磁路组件3100可以包括第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106以及第二磁性元件3108。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102和/或第二磁性元件3108可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种磁铁。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102可以包括第一磁铁，第二磁性元件3108可以包括第二磁铁，所述第一磁铁与所述第二磁铁可以相同或不同。第一导磁元件3104和/或第二导磁元件3106可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种导磁材料。第一导磁元件3104和/或第二导磁元件3106的加工方法可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种加工方式。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108可以设置为轴对称结构。例如，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108可以是圆柱体。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108可以是共轴的圆柱体，含有相同或者不同的直径。第一磁性元件3102的厚度可以大于或等于第二磁性元件3108的厚度。在一些实施例中，第二导磁元件3106可以是凹槽型结构。所述凹槽型结构可以包含U型的剖面。所述凹槽型 的第二导磁元件3106可以包括底板和侧壁。在一些实施例中，所述底板和所述侧壁可以是一体成型的，例如，所述侧壁可以由底板在垂直于底板的方向进行延伸形成。在一些实施例中，所述底板可以通过本申请中描述的任意一种或几种连接方式连接所述侧壁。第二磁性元件3108可以设定为环状或片状。关于第二磁性元件3108的形状可参考说明书中其他地方的描述。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108可以与第一磁性元件3102和/或第一导磁元件3104共轴。
第一磁性元件3102的上表面可以连接第一导磁元件3104的下表面。第一磁性元件3102的下表面可以连接第二导磁元件3106的底板。第二磁性元件3108的下表面连接第一导磁元件3104的上表面。第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106和/或第二磁性元件3108之间的连接方式可以包括粘接、卡接、焊接、铆接、螺栓连接等一种或多种组合。
第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108与第二导磁元件3106的侧壁之间形成磁间隙。音圈可以设置于所述磁间隙中。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106以及第二磁性元件3108可以形成磁回路。在一些实施例中，磁路组件3100可以产生第一全磁场，第一磁性元件3102可以产生第二磁场。所述第一全磁场由所述磁路组件3100中的所有组分(例如，第一磁性元件3102，第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106以及第二磁性元件3108)产生的磁场共同形成。所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度(也可以被称为磁感应强度或者磁通量密度)大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108可以产生第三磁场，所述第三磁场可以提高所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙处的磁场强度。
在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108的磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102的磁化方向之间的夹角在90度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108的磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102的磁化方向之间的夹角在150度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108的磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102的磁化方向相反(如图所示，a方向与b方向)。
与单一磁性元件的磁路组件相比，磁路组件3100增加了第二磁性元件3108。第二磁性元件3108磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102磁化方向相反，可以抑制第一磁性元件3102在磁化方向上的漏磁，从而使第一磁性元件3102产生的磁场可以较多地被压缩到磁间隙中，因而提高磁间隙内的磁感应强度。
需要注意的是，以上对扬声组件的描述仅仅是具体的示例，不应被视为是唯一可行的实施方案。显然，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解扬声组件的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施扬声组件的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，但是这些修正和改变仍在以上描述的范围之内。例如，磁路组件中的磁性元件不限于上述的第一磁性元件、第二磁性元件、第三磁性元件、第四磁性元件、第五磁性元件、第六磁性元件、第七磁性元件，还可以增加或减少磁性元件的数量。诸如此类的变形，均在本申请的保护范围之内。
在一些实施例中，以上描述的扬声组件也可以通过气传导的方式将声音传递给用户。当采用气传导的方式传递声音时，所述扬声组件可以包括一个或多个声源。所述声源可以位于用户头部 的特定位置，例如，头顶、额头、脸颊、鬓角、耳廓、耳廓背面等，而不用堵塞或者覆盖耳道。出于描述的目的，图31显示一种通过气传导的方式传递声音的示意图。
如图31所示，声源3310和声源3320可以产生相位相反的声波(图中以“+”和“-”表示相位相反)。为简单起见，这里所说的声源指的是扬声组件上输出声音的出声孔。例如，所述声源3310和声源3320可以是分别位于眼镜上特定位置(例如，图19中耳机壳体220，或者图1中眼镜腿15)的两个出声孔。
在一些实施例中，声源3310和声源3320可以由同一个振动装置3301产生。所述振动装置3301包括振膜(未显示在图中)。当所述振膜受到电信号驱动而振动时，振膜正面驱动空气振动，通过导声通道3312在出声孔处形成声源3310，振膜背面驱动空气振动，通过导声通道3322在出声孔处形成声源3320。所述导声通道指的是振膜到对应出声孔的声音传播路径。在一些实施例中，所述导声通道是由扬声组件上特定结构(例如，图19中耳机壳体220，或者图1中眼镜腿15)围成的路径。需要知道的是，在一些可替代的实施例中，声源3310和声源3320还可以由不同的振动装置，分别通过不同的振膜振动产生。
由声源3310和声源3320产生的声音中，一部分传递给用户耳朵形成用户听到的声音，另一部分传递到环境中形成漏音。考虑到声源3310和声源3320距离用户耳朵的位置较近，为了描述方便，所述传递到用户耳朵的声音可以称为近场声音，所述传递到环境中的漏音可以称为远场声音。在一些实施例中，所述扬声组件产生的不同频率的近场/远场声音与声源3310和声源3320之间的间距有关。一般说来，扬声组件产生的近场声音会随着两个声源之间间距的增大而增大，而产生的远场声音(漏音)会随着频率的增加而增大。
针对不同频率的声音，可以分别设计声源3310和声源3320之间的间距，使得扬声组件产生的低频近场声音(例如，频率小于800Hz的声音)尽可能大，且高频远场声音(例如，频率大于2000Hz的声音)尽可能小。为了达到以上目的，所述扬声组件中可以包括两组或两组以上的双声源，每组双声源包含类似于声源3310和声源3320的两个声源，并分别产生特定频率的声音。具体地，第一组双声源可以用于产生低频声音，第二组双声源可以用产生高频声音。为了获得较大的低频近场声音，第一组双声源中两个声源之间的距离可以设置为较大的值。并且由于低频信号的波长较长，双声源之间较大的距离不会在远场形成过大的相位差，因而也不会在远场中形成过多的漏音。为了使得高频远场声音较小，第二组双声源中两个声源之间的距离可以设置为较小的值。由于高频信号的波长较短，双声源之间较小的距离可以避免在远场形成大的相位差，因而可以避免形成大的漏音。所述第二组双声源之间的距离小于所述第一组双声源之间的距离。
本申请实施例可能带来的有益效果包括但不限于：(1)通过转轴组件，可以连接眼镜框和眼镜腿，保护眼镜中的连接线，延长连接线的寿命；(2)通过软性电路板，可以简化扬声器内的走线方式；(3)通过在磁路组件中增设磁性元件、导磁元件和导电元件，可以提高扬声器装置的灵敏度。需要说明的是，不同实施例可能产生的有益效果不同，在不同的实施例里，可能产生的有益效果可以是以上任意一种或几种的组合，也可以是其他任何可能获得的有益效果。
上文已对基本概念做了描述，显然，对于本领域技术人员来说，上述发明披露仅仅作为示例，而并不构成对本申请的限定。虽然此处并没有明确说明，本领域技术人员可能会对本申请进行各种修改、改进和修正。该类修改、改进和修正在本申请中被建议，所以该类修改、改进、修正仍属于本申请示范实施例的精神和范围。
同时，本申请使用了特定词语来描述本申请的实施例。如“一个实施例”、“一实施例”和/或“一些实施例”意指与本申请至少一个实施例相关的某一特征、结构或特点。因此，应强调并注意的是，本说明书中在不同位置两次或多次提及的“一实施例”或“一个实施例”或“一替代性实施例”并不一定是指同一实施例。此外，本申请的一个或多个实施例中的某些特征、结构或特点可以进行适当的组合。
此外，本领域技术人员可以理解，本申请的各方面可以通过若干具有可专利性的种类或情况进行说明和描述，包括任何新的和有用的工序、机器、产品或物质的组合或对他们的任何新的和有用的改进。相应地，本申请的各个方面可以完全由硬件执行、可以完全由软件(包括固件、常驻软件、微码等)执行、也可以由硬件和软件组合执行。以上硬件或软件均可被称为“模块”、“单元”、“组件”或“系统”。此外，本申请的各方面可能表现为位于一个或多个计算机可读介质中的计算机产品，该产品包括计算机可读程序编码。
此外，除非权利要求中明确说明，本申请所述处理元素和序列的顺序、数字字母的使用或其他名称的使用，并非用于限定本申请流程和方法的顺序。尽管上述披露中通过各种示例讨论了一些目前认为有用的发明实施例，但应当理解的是，该类细节仅起到说明的目的，附加的权利要求并不仅限于披露的实施例，相反，权利要求旨在覆盖所有符合本申请实施例实质和范围的修正和等价组合。例如，虽然以上所描述的系统组件可以通过硬件设备实现，但是也可以只通过软件的解决方案得以实现，如在现有的服务器或移动设备上安装所描述的系统。
同理，应当注意的是，为了简化本申请披露的表述，从而帮助对一个或多个发明实施例的理解，前文对本申请实施例的描述中，有时会将多种特征归并至一个实施例、附图或对其的描述中。但是，这种披露方法并不意味着本申请对象所需要的特征比权利要求中提及的特征多。实际上，实施例的特征要少于上述披露的单个实施例的全部特征。
一些实施例中使用了描述成分、属性数量的数字，应当理解的是，此类用于实施例描述的数字，在一些示例中使用了修饰词“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”等来修饰。除非另外说明，“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”表明所述数字允许有±20％的变化。相应地，在一些实施例中，说明书和权利要求中使用的数值数据均为近似值，该近似值根据个别实施例所需特点可以发生改变。在一些实施例中，数值数据应考虑规定的有效数位并采用一般位数保留的方法。尽管本申请一些实施例中用于确认其范围广度的数值域和数据为近似值，在具体实施例中，此类数值的设定在可行范围内尽可能精确。
最后，应当理解的是，本申请中所述实施例仅用以说明本申请实施例的原则。其他的变形也可能属于本申请的范围。因此，作为示例而非限制，本申请实施例的替代配置可视为与本申请的 教导一致。相应地，本申请的实施例不仅限于本申请明确介绍和描述的实施例。

Claims (31)

  1. 一种眼镜，其特征在于，所述眼镜包括：
    眼镜框；
    眼镜腿，所述眼镜腿中容纳控制电路或电池；
    转轴组件，所述转轴组件用于连接所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿，以使得所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿能够绕所述转轴组件进行相对转动，所述转轴组件沿轴向设置有转轴走线通道；
    连接线，所述连接线穿设于所述转轴走线通道内并分别延伸至所述眼镜框及所述眼镜腿；以及
    扬声组件，所述扬声组件包括耳机芯和用于容纳所述耳机芯的机芯壳体，所述扬声组件与所述眼镜腿连接，所述机芯壳体包括面向人体一侧的外壳面板和与所述外壳面板相对的外壳背面；所述控制电路或电池通过所述的连接线驱动所述耳机芯振动以产生声音，所述耳机芯的振动导致所述外壳面板和所述外壳背面振动，所述外壳面板的振动具有第一相位，所述外壳背面的振动具有第二相位，其中，所述外壳面板的振动和所述外壳背面的振动频率在2000Hz到3000Hz时，所述第一相位和所述第二相位的差值的绝对值小于60度。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述转轴组件包括第一转轴，所述第一转轴的两端分别连接所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿，所述转轴走线通道沿所述第一转轴的轴向设置，所述转轴走线通道通过设置于所述第一转轴的至少一端面上的走线口与外部连通，所述连接线经所述走线口延伸至所述眼镜框或所述眼镜腿。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述转轴走线通道通过分别设置于所述第一转轴的两端面上的第一走线口和第二走线口与外部连通，所述连接线经所述第一走线口和第二走线口分别延伸至所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿。
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述转轴走线通道通过设置于所述第一转轴的端面上的第一走线口和设置于所述第一转轴的侧壁上的第二走线口与外部连通，所述连接线经所述第一走线口和第二走线口分别延伸至所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第一转轴与所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿中靠近所述第二走线口设置的一者固定连接，且与所述眼镜框和所述眼镜腿中靠近所述第一走线口设置的另一者转动连接。
  6. 据权利要求4所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述转轴组件进一步包括与所述第一转轴同轴且间隔的第二转轴；
    所述眼镜框包括第一凸耳，所述眼镜腿包括间隔设置的第二凸耳和第三凸耳，
    所述第一转轴和所述第二转轴互相靠近的端部均与所述第一凸耳连接，所述第一转轴和所述第二转轴互相远离的端部分别与所述第二凸耳和第三凸耳连接，以将所述第一凸耳保持在所述第二凸耳与所述第三凸耳之间。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第一走线口设置于所述第一转轴靠近所述第二转轴的端面，所述第二走线口设置于所述第一转轴靠近所述第二凸耳的侧壁上，所述第一转轴与所述第一凸耳转动连接，并与所述第二凸耳固定连接。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第一凸耳和所述第二凸耳同轴设置有第一容置孔和第二容置孔，其中所述第一容置孔和第二容置孔的尺寸设置成允许所述第一转轴从所述眼镜腿的外部经所述第二容置孔插入到所述第一容置孔内，并且使得所述第一转轴与所述第二容置孔过盈配合且与所述第一容置孔间隙配合。
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第一凸耳和所述第三凸耳同轴设置有第三容置孔和第四容置孔，其中第三容置孔和第四容置孔的尺寸设置成允许所述第二转轴从所述眼镜腿的外部经所述第四容置孔插入到所述第三容置孔内，并且使得所述第二转轴与所述第三容置孔过盈配合且与所述第四容置孔间隙配合，或使得所述第二转轴与所述第三容置孔间隙配合且与所述第四容置孔过盈配合。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第二转轴为实心轴，所述第二转轴的直径小于所述第一转轴的直径，在佩戴状态下，所述第二转轴位于所述眼镜腿的上侧，所述第一转轴位于所述眼镜腿的下侧；所述第一转轴的用于设置所述第一走线口的端面与所述第一转轴的用于定义所述转轴走线通道的内壁面的连接处呈弧形设计。
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述扬声组件还包括：
    辅助功能模块，用于接收辅助信号，执行辅助功能；
    软性电路板，用于电连接所述控制电路的音频信号导线和辅助信号导线，并通过所述软性电路板将所述音频信号导线和所述辅助信号导线分别与所述耳机芯和所述辅助功能模块电连接；其中，所述辅助功能模块和所述软性电路板设置于所述机芯壳体中。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述软性电路板至少包括多个第一焊盘和多个第二焊盘；
    所述多个第一焊盘中的至少一个第一焊盘与所述音频信号导线电连接，所述至少一个第一焊盘通过所述软性电路板上的第一软性引线与至少一个所述第二焊盘电连接，所述至少一个第二焊盘通过外部导线与所述耳机芯电连接；以及
    所述多个第一焊盘中的至少另一个第一焊盘与所述辅助信号导线电连接，所述至少另一个第一焊盘与所述辅助功能模块通过所述软性电路板上的第二软性引线电连接。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的眼镜，其特征在于，
    所述辅助功能模块用于实现图像功能、语音功能、辅助控制功能、开关控制功能中的一种或几种功能。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的眼镜，其特征在于，
    所述软性电路板至少包括主体电路板和第一分支电路板，所述第一分支电路板和所述主体电路板相连，并远离所述主体电路板沿所述主体电路板的一端延伸；以及
    所述辅助功能模块至少包括第一辅助功能模块和第二辅助功能模块，所述第一辅助功能模块设置于所述主体电路板上，所述第二辅助功能模块设置于所述第一分支电路板上。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述多个第一焊盘设置于所述主体电路板上，所述至少一个第二焊盘设置于所述第一分支电路板上。
  16. 根据权利要求14所述的眼镜，其特征在于，
    所述软性电路板还包括第二分支电路板，所述第二分支电路板和所述主体电路板相连，并远离所述主体电路板沿所述主体电路板的另一端延伸，并与所述第一分支电路板间隔设置；以及
    所述辅助功能模块还包括第三辅助功能模块，所述第三辅助功能模块设置在所述第二分支电路板上。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的眼镜，其特征在于，
    所述多个第一焊盘设置于所述主体电路板上，至少一个所述第二焊盘设置于所述第一分支电路板上，其他所述第二焊盘设置于所述第二分支电路板上。
  18. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述耳机芯包括：
    磁路组件，用于提供磁场；
    振动组件，所述振动组件包括线圈和内部引线，所述线圈位于所述磁场中，所述内部引线与所述线圈电连接；所述线圈能够通过所述内部引线接收音频电流，将所述音频电流在磁场的作用下转化为机械振动信号，所述外部导线，一端与所述第二焊盘电连接，另一端与所述内部引线电连接，将所述音频电流传输至所述线圈。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述机芯壳体内具有埋线槽，所述外部导线和/或所述内部引线线设置于所述埋线槽内。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述内部引线和所述外部引线彼此焊接，焊接位置位于所述埋线槽内。
  21. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板的振动具有第一振幅，所述外壳背面的振动具有第二振幅，所述第一振幅和所述第二振幅的比值在0.5到1.5的范围之内。
  22. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板的振动产生第一漏音声波，所述外壳背面的振动产生第二漏音声波，所述第一漏音声波和所述第二漏音声波相互叠加，所述叠加减小了所述第一漏音声波的幅值。
  23. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板与所述外壳其它部分通过胶水、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接中的一种或任意几种的组合进行连接。
  24. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板和所述外壳背面由纤维增强塑料材料制成。
  25. 根据权利要求18所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述磁路组件包括：
    第一磁性元件，所述第一磁性元件产生第二磁场；
    第一导磁元件；以及
    至少一个第二磁性元件，所述至少一个第二磁性元件环绕所述第一磁性元件，并与所述第一磁性元件之间形成磁间隙，所述第一磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    第二导磁元件；以及
    至少一个第三磁性元件，其中，所述至少一个第三磁性元件连接所述第二导磁元件和所述至少一个第二磁性元件。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    至少一个第四磁性元件，其中，所述至少一个第四磁性元件位于所述磁间隙的下方并连接所述第一磁性元件以及所述第二导磁元件。
  28. 根据权利要求25所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    至少一个第五磁性元件，其中，所述至少一个第五磁性元件连接所述第一导磁元件的上表面。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    第三导磁元件，其中，所述第三导磁元件连接所述第五磁性元件的上表面，所述第三导磁元件被配置为抑制所述第一磁场的场强泄露。
  30. 根据权利要求26所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第一导磁元件连接所述第一磁性元件的上表面，所述第二导磁元件包括底板和侧壁，以及所述第一磁性元件连接所述第二导磁元件的底板。
  31. 根据权利要求26所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    至少一个导电元件，其中，所述导电元件连接所述第一磁性元件、所述第一导磁元件，或所述第二导磁元件中的至少一个元件。
PCT/CN2019/102386 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜 WO2020038478A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/137,386 US11940670B2 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-12-30 Eyeglasses

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810975515.1A CN108873372B (zh) 2018-08-24 2018-08-24 一种铰链及眼镜
CN201810975515.1 2018-08-24
CN201910009904.3 2019-01-05
CN201920031804.6 2019-01-05
CN201910009904.3A CN109495809B (zh) 2019-01-05 2019-01-05 骨传导扬声装置
CN201920031804.6U CN209267805U (zh) 2019-01-05 2019-01-05 骨传导耳机芯及骨传导扬声装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/137,386 Continuation US11940670B2 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-12-30 Eyeglasses

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020038478A1 true WO2020038478A1 (zh) 2020-02-27

Family

ID=69592296

Family Applications (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/102391 WO2020038481A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102406 WO2020038486A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102407 WO2020038487A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102386 WO2020038478A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102390 WO2020038480A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102398 WO2020038485A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种扬声器装置
PCT/CN2019/102378 WO2020038475A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种扬声器
PCT/CN2019/102408 WO2020038488A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/102391 WO2020038481A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102406 WO2020038486A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102407 WO2020038487A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/102390 WO2020038480A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102398 WO2020038485A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种扬声器装置
PCT/CN2019/102378 WO2020038475A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种扬声器
PCT/CN2019/102408 WO2020038488A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (11) US11846831B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3828620A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP7208401B2 (zh)
KR (1) KR102528290B1 (zh)
BR (1) BR112021003527A8 (zh)
RU (1) RU2766545C1 (zh)
WO (8) WO2020038481A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20210020122A (ko) * 2018-06-15 2021-02-23 션젼 복스테크 컴퍼니 리미티드 골전도 스피커 및 그의 테스트 방법

Families Citing this family (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11363362B2 (en) 2018-06-15 2022-06-14 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Speaker device
US11463814B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2022-10-04 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Bone conduction speaker and compound vibration device thereof
US11690847B2 (en) 2016-11-30 2023-07-04 Case Western Reserve University Combinations of 15-PGDH inhibitors with corticosteroids and/or TNF inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2018145080A1 (en) 2017-02-06 2018-08-09 Case Western Reserve University Compositions and methods of modulating short-chain dehydrogenase activity
US12013538B2 (en) 2017-07-03 2024-06-18 Holovisions LLC Augmented reality (AR) eyewear with a section of a fresnel reflector comprising individually-adjustable transmissive-reflective optical elements
CN109547906B (zh) 2019-01-05 2023-12-08 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声装置
TWI761685B (zh) * 2019-06-24 2022-04-21 緯創資通股份有限公司 穿戴式顯示裝置
US11590027B2 (en) 2019-09-09 2023-02-28 Gateway Safety, Inc. Metal-detectable lens assemblies and protective eyewear including same
US11925582B2 (en) 2019-09-09 2024-03-12 Gateway Safety, Inc. Metal-detectable lens assemblies and protective eyewear including same
AU2021263005B2 (en) 2020-04-30 2023-08-10 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Bone conduction earphones
TWM606182U (zh) * 2020-09-17 2021-01-01 鄭溪州 帶有藍芽無線雙聲道耳機的多功能眼鏡
US11516573B2 (en) * 2020-09-19 2022-11-29 Shenzhen Mengda Network Technology Co., Ltd. Split bone conduction earphone
EP4151869A4 (en) * 2020-11-19 2023-10-25 BOE Technology Group Co., Ltd. ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND ASSOCIATED ROTATING SHAFT MECHANISM
CN215072893U (zh) * 2021-04-01 2021-12-07 深圳市亿音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声装置
KR102417634B1 (ko) * 2021-04-06 2022-07-06 부전전자 주식회사 헤드셋의 실리콘 방수 구조
KR20220166107A (ko) * 2021-06-09 2022-12-16 삼성전자주식회사 방열 구조를 포함하는 전자 장치
CN113784244B (zh) * 2021-08-31 2023-07-25 歌尔科技有限公司 一种开放场远场消声喇叭装置、头戴设备和信号处理方法
USD1022016S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022018S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022020S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022019S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022017S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022023S1 (en) 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Endpieces of glasses with headphones
USD1022011S1 (en) 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. V-shaped part of glasses with headphones
CN217116309U (zh) * 2022-03-30 2022-08-02 瑞声光电科技(常州)有限公司 扬声器箱
US20240017683A1 (en) * 2022-07-14 2024-01-18 Zephyros, Inc. Baffle with drain path

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS59161928A (ja) * 1983-03-04 1984-09-12 Miyota Seimitsu Kk ラジオ付きメガネの配置構造
CN204374548U (zh) * 2015-01-21 2015-06-03 郭钧 智能蓝牙眼镜
CN108600920A (zh) * 2018-01-08 2018-09-28 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN109495809A (zh) * 2019-01-05 2019-03-19 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声装置
CN208847977U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-05-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN209120433U (zh) * 2018-06-15 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器

Family Cites Families (126)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2327320A (en) 1941-11-12 1943-08-17 Sonotone Corp Amplifying hearing aid
DE8529437U1 (de) * 1985-10-16 1987-06-11 Siemens AG, 1000 Berlin und 8000 München Richtmikrofon
US4902120A (en) 1988-11-22 1990-02-20 Weyer Frank M Eyeglass headphones
CA2059597A1 (en) * 1991-01-22 1992-07-23 Paul A. Vogt Radio eyewear
CA2071040A1 (en) * 1992-06-11 1993-12-12 Jacob Gluz Earphone-type speaker assembly
US6010216A (en) * 1993-01-19 2000-01-04 Jesiek; Daniel Stephen "Hear speak" two-way voice radio communications eyeglasses
US6676592B2 (en) * 1993-07-01 2004-01-13 Symphonix Devices, Inc. Dual coil floating mass transducers
EP0806099B1 (en) 1995-01-25 2000-08-30 Philip Ashley Haynes Communication method
US6163926A (en) * 1999-11-12 2000-12-26 Ppg Industries Ohio, Inc. Split-pin hinge with wire extending therethrough
US6850138B1 (en) 1999-12-02 2005-02-01 Nec Tokin Corporation Vibration actuator having an elastic member between a suspension plate and a magnetic circuit device
US6456720B1 (en) * 1999-12-10 2002-09-24 Sonic Innovations Flexible circuit board assembly for a hearing aid
KR100344091B1 (ko) 2000-04-18 2002-07-24 주식회사 도우미텍 골도 진동자 및 이것을 이용한 골도 스피커 헤드셋
US20120105740A1 (en) * 2000-06-02 2012-05-03 Oakley, Inc. Eyewear with detachable adjustable electronics module
US6409338B1 (en) * 2000-09-25 2002-06-25 Frank Saleem Jewell Air-generating audible spectacles device
US6769767B2 (en) * 2001-04-30 2004-08-03 Qr Spex, Inc. Eyewear with exchangeable temples housing a transceiver forming ad hoc networks with other devices
US20030048911A1 (en) * 2001-09-10 2003-03-13 Furst Claus Erdmann Miniature speaker with integrated signal processing electronics
JP2005534269A (ja) * 2002-07-26 2005-11-10 オークレイ・インコーポレイテッド 無線対話式ヘッドセット
JP2004274593A (ja) 2003-03-11 2004-09-30 Temuko Japan:Kk 骨伝導スピーカ
US7477751B2 (en) 2003-04-23 2009-01-13 Rh Lyon Corp Method and apparatus for sound transduction with minimal interference from background noise and minimal local acoustic radiation
CN2639920Y (zh) 2003-07-29 2004-09-08 黄陈才 眼镜架弹性铰链
US7079876B2 (en) * 2003-12-23 2006-07-18 Isaac Levy Wireless telephone headset built into eyeglasses
US7289767B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2007-10-30 Chia Song Lai Wireless communication glasses
EP1718043A4 (en) 2004-02-20 2007-02-28 Temco Japan BONE LINE HANDSET
JP2005352024A (ja) * 2004-06-09 2005-12-22 Murata Mfg Co Ltd 眼鏡型インタフェース装置及びセキュリティシステム
US20060034478A1 (en) 2004-08-11 2006-02-16 Davenport Kevin E Audio eyeglasses
CN2739664Y (zh) * 2004-10-13 2005-11-09 珠海精准表业有限公司 带音乐播放器的眼镜
WO2006055884A2 (en) * 2004-11-19 2006-05-26 Oakley, Inc. Wireless interactive headset
JP2006157318A (ja) 2004-11-29 2006-06-15 Nec Tokin Corp 骨伝導スピーカーユニット
US20060158608A1 (en) * 2005-01-19 2006-07-20 Chung-Hung Lin Eyeglasses with signal receiving function
WO2006079254A1 (en) * 2005-01-31 2006-08-03 Jow Tong Technology Co., Ltd. Eyeglasses with signal receiving function
JP4631070B2 (ja) 2005-05-23 2011-02-16 並木精密宝石株式会社 骨伝導スピーカ
KR100767260B1 (ko) * 2005-10-31 2007-10-17 (주)케이에이치 케미컬 음향 진동판 및 이를 구비하는 스피커
WO2007070508A2 (en) 2005-12-13 2007-06-21 Marcio Marc Abreu Biologically fit wearable electronics apparatus and methods
US7784935B2 (en) * 2006-01-20 2010-08-31 Jackson Michael T Eyewear with removable audio system
JP2007251358A (ja) 2006-03-14 2007-09-27 Nec Tokin Corp 骨伝導スピーカ
WO2007107985A2 (en) 2006-03-22 2007-09-27 David Weisman Method and system for bone conduction sound propagation
JP4992062B2 (ja) 2006-05-17 2012-08-08 キム、スング−ホー 骨伝導ヘッドセット
KR101135396B1 (ko) 2006-07-03 2012-04-17 아이필유(주) 다기능 초소형 스피커
TW200804887A (en) * 2006-07-12 2008-01-16 Jia-Lin Jou Slim frame of spectacle having electronic device thereon, and spectacle having the same
US20090290730A1 (en) 2006-09-07 2009-11-26 Temco Japan Co., Ltd. Bone conduction speaker
US7380935B2 (en) 2006-09-12 2008-06-03 Chic Optic, Inc. Mechanical universal hinge
US9118990B2 (en) * 2007-01-06 2015-08-25 Apple Inc. Connectors designed for ease of use
WO2008119056A1 (en) * 2007-03-27 2008-10-02 Future Sonics, Inc. System and method for an earphone device
GB0714081D0 (en) * 2007-07-17 2007-08-29 Lewis Marcus Audio equipment
US8391534B2 (en) 2008-07-23 2013-03-05 Asius Technologies, Llc Inflatable ear device
US8270637B2 (en) 2008-02-15 2012-09-18 Sonitus Medical, Inc. Headset systems and methods
TWM349154U (en) * 2008-08-21 2009-01-11 Jetvox Acoustic Corp Dual frequency coaxial earphone with common magnet
WO2010046988A1 (ja) * 2008-10-23 2010-04-29 パイオニア株式会社 スピーカ装置
JP2010177901A (ja) * 2009-01-28 2010-08-12 Funai Electric Co Ltd マイクロホンユニット
GB2476033A (en) * 2009-12-04 2011-06-15 Marcus Lewis Personal audio equipment device
US20110293120A1 (en) * 2010-05-25 2011-12-01 Timothy Val Kolton Earphone transducer
US8320579B2 (en) * 2010-06-29 2012-11-27 Research In Motion Limited Control cord for headsets and auxiliary devices
ITPD20100056U1 (it) 2010-07-15 2012-01-16 Visottica Ind Spa Cerniera per occhiali
CN201984240U (zh) * 2011-01-31 2011-09-21 雅视光学有限公司 一种眼镜的铰接装置
CN102141688B (zh) * 2011-03-30 2012-08-22 黄维克 一种可容纳排线或柔性线路板的镜架铰链
CN202364340U (zh) * 2011-08-05 2012-08-01 歌尔声学股份有限公司 一种硅麦克风阵列的固定机构及蓝牙耳机
JP5667018B2 (ja) 2011-09-06 2015-02-12 Kddi株式会社 携帯電話端末、携帯電話端末の音声伝達方法、携帯電話端末の音声伝達プログラム
JP5676003B2 (ja) 2011-09-30 2015-02-25 京セラ株式会社 携帯電子機器
JP5926950B2 (ja) 2011-12-22 2016-05-25 京セラ株式会社 電子機器
CN108873372B (zh) * 2018-08-24 2024-06-14 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
CN102497612B (zh) 2011-12-23 2013-05-29 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器及其复合振动装置
CN102523546A (zh) 2011-12-30 2012-06-27 歌尔声学股份有限公司 微型动圈式发声器及其组装方法
JP5812925B2 (ja) 2012-04-12 2015-11-17 京セラ株式会社 電子機器
CN202679440U (zh) 2012-06-08 2013-01-16 瑞声光电科技(常州)有限公司 带骨传导功能的通信装置
JP6006598B2 (ja) 2012-09-27 2016-10-12 京セラ株式会社 電子機器
WO2014063345A1 (zh) * 2012-10-26 2014-05-01 易力声科技(深圳)有限公司 一种头戴式耳机
US20140253867A1 (en) 2013-03-05 2014-09-11 Tao Jiang Pair of Projector Glasses
CN103167390B (zh) 2013-04-09 2017-04-19 苏州逸巛声学科技有限公司 具有气导作用的骨传导受话器
EP4040805A3 (en) * 2013-08-09 2022-10-05 MED-EL Elektromedizinische Geräte GmbH Bone conduction hearing aid system
CN203786416U (zh) 2013-10-24 2014-08-20 玉环富华眼镜有限公司 一种眼镜用弹性铰链
ITMI20131797A1 (it) * 2013-10-29 2015-04-30 Buhel S R L Trasduttore elettromagnetico per generare vibrazioni per la conduzione ossea di suoni e/o parole
CN103716739B (zh) 2014-01-06 2016-11-02 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种抑制骨传导扬声器漏音的方法及骨传导扬声器
CN103792683B (zh) * 2014-01-26 2015-04-08 杭州双弯月电子科技有限公司 骨传导蓝牙眼镜
KR101514677B1 (ko) * 2014-01-28 2015-05-20 주식회사 예일전자 골전도 출력장치
US9675259B2 (en) * 2014-03-12 2017-06-13 Cheng Uei Precision Industry Co., Ltd. Physiological function detecting earphone and detecting method thereof
TWM507624U (zh) * 2015-03-27 2015-08-21 Jetvox Acoustic Corp 音域切換耳機
US20150319546A1 (en) * 2015-04-14 2015-11-05 Okappi, Inc. Hearing Assistance System
CN204887455U (zh) * 2015-08-13 2015-12-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种改善骨传导扬声器音质的骨传导扬声器
CN106954153B (zh) 2015-08-13 2020-04-14 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声器
CN107209373B (zh) * 2015-09-27 2020-07-28 深圳市柔宇科技有限公司 头戴式显示设备
CN205103503U (zh) 2015-11-25 2016-03-23 温州市益大眼镜有限公司 一种双芯内定位弹性镜腿
US10670888B1 (en) * 2015-12-28 2020-06-02 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Head-mounted wearable device with integrated circuitry
CN205301727U (zh) 2015-12-29 2016-06-08 高正生 一种弹性眼镜脚
CN106974645A (zh) 2016-01-22 2017-07-25 周常安 眼镜式脑部活动传感器以及眼镜式电生理活动感测装置
CN106994014A (zh) * 2016-01-22 2017-08-01 周常安 耳戴式电极结构及穿戴式生理感测装置及系统
US9674597B1 (en) * 2016-02-10 2017-06-06 Bose Corporation Electrical circuit board with embedded acoustic channel
EP3455670A1 (en) * 2016-05-09 2019-03-20 Oakley, Inc. Modular wearable electronic devices, systems, and methods
CN205793159U (zh) * 2016-05-24 2016-12-07 广东伟旺达科技股份有限公司 一种动圈与压电一体式耳机
CN205793173U (zh) 2016-05-30 2016-12-07 歌尔股份有限公司 一种耳机接线焊盘和一种耳机
CN205720956U (zh) 2016-06-08 2016-11-23 王泽玲 一种无线骨传导眼镜
CN205987287U (zh) 2016-08-17 2017-02-22 江西联创电声有限公司 新型声腔结构耳机
CN205961389U (zh) 2016-08-29 2017-02-15 张灿锋 一种骨传导耳机及带有骨传导耳机的眼镜
CN206061075U (zh) * 2016-09-06 2017-03-29 深圳市凯狮博电子有限公司 一种智能蓝牙耳机
CN206421112U (zh) * 2016-10-18 2017-08-18 深圳市看见智能科技有限公司 转轴构件改良型智能眼镜
RU172082U1 (ru) * 2016-11-21 2017-06-28 Георгий Леонович Башинджагян Электронные очки
CN206292473U (zh) 2016-11-25 2017-06-30 陈光华 一种带骨传导功能的眼镜腿、眼镜及眼镜盒
CN206387972U (zh) * 2016-12-30 2017-08-08 杨启鹏 一种眼镜用弹簧铰链
CN206365029U (zh) * 2016-12-30 2017-07-28 歌尔丹拿音响有限公司 扬声器
CN206920741U (zh) 2017-01-16 2018-01-23 张�浩 骨传导眼镜
CN206563855U (zh) 2017-03-22 2017-10-17 深圳市型社眼镜有限公司 一种眼镜弹性铰链及眼镜架
CN206640748U (zh) * 2017-03-22 2017-11-14 北京金锐德路科技有限公司 脖戴式语音交互智能设备
US10659868B1 (en) * 2017-03-28 2020-05-19 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Field replaceable spacer for head-mounted wearable device
US20180333590A1 (en) * 2017-05-17 2018-11-22 Matthew D. Millard Head worn device for treating alzheimer's disease
US10699691B1 (en) * 2017-06-29 2020-06-30 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Active noise cancellation for bone conduction speaker of a head-mounted wearable device
CN207424414U (zh) * 2017-09-19 2018-05-29 浙江帝力眼镜股份有限公司 一种眼镜
CN207443120U (zh) 2017-09-28 2018-06-01 盐城宝丰磁电有限公司 一种防水扬声器结构
CN207266241U (zh) 2017-09-29 2018-04-20 歌尔科技有限公司 一种主动降噪耳机
CN107942536B (zh) * 2017-11-28 2019-03-05 苏州佑克骨传导科技有限公司 一种带有骨传导耳机的太阳眼镜
US20190041666A1 (en) * 2017-12-28 2019-02-07 Nicolas Abele Electronically reinforced head-wearable apparatus and related methods
CN207718105U (zh) * 2018-01-08 2018-08-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导眼镜
CN110022503A (zh) 2018-01-08 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导发声装置
CN207720370U (zh) * 2018-01-08 2018-08-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导发声装置
CN117395572A (zh) * 2018-01-08 2024-01-12 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN108391188B (zh) 2018-02-11 2020-02-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种扬声器组件及电子设备
CN208079380U (zh) 2018-03-16 2018-11-09 歌尔科技有限公司 一种扬声器单体和一种主动降噪耳塞
CN208780925U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN208780926U (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
CN208780932U (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种电子组件及眼镜
CN108845436A (zh) * 2018-08-24 2018-11-20 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN209267805U (zh) * 2019-01-05 2019-08-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导耳机芯及骨传导扬声装置
CN108776393A (zh) * 2018-08-24 2018-11-09 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN109061902B (zh) * 2018-08-24 2024-09-13 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种电子组件及眼镜
CN208847981U (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-05-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
CN208780924U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN209358728U (zh) 2019-01-05 2019-09-06 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声装置
CN209184747U (zh) 2019-01-05 2019-07-30 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声装置

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS59161928A (ja) * 1983-03-04 1984-09-12 Miyota Seimitsu Kk ラジオ付きメガネの配置構造
CN204374548U (zh) * 2015-01-21 2015-06-03 郭钧 智能蓝牙眼镜
CN108600920A (zh) * 2018-01-08 2018-09-28 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN209120433U (zh) * 2018-06-15 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN208847977U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-05-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN109495809A (zh) * 2019-01-05 2019-03-19 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声装置

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20210020122A (ko) * 2018-06-15 2021-02-23 션젼 복스테크 컴퍼니 리미티드 골전도 스피커 및 그의 테스트 방법
EP3793214A4 (en) * 2018-06-15 2021-07-14 Shenzhen Voxtech Co., Ltd. BONE CONDUCTION LOUDSPEAKER AND ITS TEST PROCEDURE
KR102414292B1 (ko) 2018-06-15 2022-06-29 션젼 복스테크 컴퍼니 리미티드 골전도 스피커 및 그의 테스트 방법

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2020038480A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
BR112021003527A2 (pt) 2021-05-18
US20230152606A1 (en) 2023-05-18
US11940670B2 (en) 2024-03-26
US20210072564A1 (en) 2021-03-11
US11940669B2 (en) 2024-03-26
WO2020038487A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US20210063774A1 (en) 2021-03-04
US20210168481A1 (en) 2021-06-03
KR20210046058A (ko) 2021-04-27
US20210173232A1 (en) 2021-06-10
US11846831B2 (en) 2023-12-19
BR112021003527A8 (pt) 2023-03-07
WO2020038481A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
WO2020038486A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US11977275B2 (en) 2024-05-07
JP2021535701A (ja) 2021-12-16
EP3828620A1 (en) 2021-06-02
US20240168316A1 (en) 2024-05-23
KR102528290B1 (ko) 2023-05-03
EP3828620A4 (en) 2022-03-16
US11644692B2 (en) 2023-05-09
US11899284B2 (en) 2024-02-13
US20240241395A1 (en) 2024-07-18
WO2020038488A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US20210116719A1 (en) 2021-04-22
RU2022102528A (ru) 2022-03-01
US11592690B2 (en) 2023-02-28
WO2020038485A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US20210168482A1 (en) 2021-06-03
RU2766545C1 (ru) 2022-03-15
WO2020038475A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US11906817B2 (en) 2024-02-20
US20210116723A1 (en) 2021-04-22
US20210165249A1 (en) 2021-06-03
JP7208401B2 (ja) 2023-01-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020038478A1 (zh) 一种眼镜
US11805354B2 (en) Loudspeaker apparatus
US11671742B2 (en) Loudspeaker apparatus
US20210168489A1 (en) Loudspeaker device
WO2020038483A1 (zh) 一种眼镜
WO2020140458A1 (zh) 一种扬声器装置
US11678102B2 (en) Speaker device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19852631

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19852631

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1